Volvo 2013 XC60 Owner's Manual Owners

User Manual: Volvo 2013 XC60 Owner's Manual 2013 Volvo XC60 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 382

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

XC60

Owner's Manual

L:7:9>I>DC

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you
will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile
designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you
to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating
instructions in this manual.
We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times
in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a

vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and
emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle,
please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting
Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents

00 01 02

00 Introduction

01 Safety

Important information................................. 6
Environment.............................................. 12
Important warnings................................... 13

Occupant safety........................................
Reporting safety defects...........................
Seat belts .................................................
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....
Occupant Weight Sensor .........................
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags .....
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...............................
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS.....
Rollover Protection System (ROPS) .........
Crash mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
Child restraint systems.............................
Infant seats...............................................
Convertible seats......................................
Booster cushions......................................
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors..................
Top tether anchors....................................
Integrated booster cushion.......................
Child safety locks......................................

02 Locks and alarm

16
17
18
21
26
30
32
33
35
36
37
40
42
44
46
47
48
49
52

Remote key and key blade.......................
Keyless drive.............................................
Locks........................................................
Alarm.........................................................

56
64
67
70

Contents

03 04 05

03 Your driving environment

04 Driver support

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Instruments and controls.......................... 76
Ignition modes.......................................... 84
Seats......................................................... 86
Steering wheel.......................................... 93
Lighting..................................................... 94
Wipers and washers............................... 102
Power windows....................................... 105
Mirrors..................................................... 107
Compass*............................................... 109
Laminated panoramic roof*.................... 110

Stability system....................................... 134
Road sign information (RSI) ................... 136
Cruise control.......................................... 138
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*.............. 140
Distance Alert* ....................................... 151
City Safety™ .......................................... 154
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and
Pedestrian Detection*............................. 160
Driver Alert System* ............................... 168
Park assist*............................................. 174
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ............ 178
Blind Spot Information System*.............. 182

Volvo Sensus..........................................
Menus and messages.............................
The MY CAR menus...............................
Climate system.......................................
Trip computer.........................................
Active chassis system–Four C*...............
Passenger compartment convenience...

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*....
Starting the engine..................................
Transmission...........................................
Brakes.....................................................
Parking brake..........................................
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*....................

113
116
121
124
127
130

188
189
191
197
205
207
208

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Contents

06 07 08

06 Infotainment

Introduction.............................................
Radio.......................................................
Media player...........................................
AUX/USB sockets...................................

07 During your trip

214
225
234
238

Bluetooth media ................................... 241
Bluetooth® hands-free connection ........
Cell phone voice control.........................
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* .............
Remote control*......................................

243
251
255
264

Driving recommendations.......................
Refueling.................................................
Loading...................................................
Cargo area .............................................
Towing a trailer.......................................
Emergency towing..................................

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Wheels and tires

268
271
276
280
283
286

General information ...............................
Tire inflation.............................................
Inflation pressure ...................................
Tire designations ....................................
Glossary of tire terminology ...................
Vehicle loading .......................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires .
Temporary Spare ...................................
Tire Sealing System................................
Changing a wheel ..................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

292
295
297
298
300
301
303
304
305
306
312
316

Contents

09 10 11

09 Maintenance and
specifications

Volvo maintenance..................................
Maintaining your car...............................
Hood and engine compartment..............
Engine oil................................................
Fluids......................................................
Replacing bulbs......................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid................
Battery.....................................................
Fuses......................................................
Vehicle care.............................................

322
323
325
326
328
330
337
339
342
350

10 Specifications

11 Index

Label information.................................... 358
Specifications......................................... 360
Overview of information and warning symbols......................................................... 366
Volvo programs....................................... 369

Index....................................................... 370

Introduction
Important information
Contacting Volvo

About this manual

In the USA:

• Before you operate your vehicle for the first

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive,
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada:
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp
National Customer Service

• Information contained in the balance of the

Risk of injury

• The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it
should be kept in the vehicle for ready
access.

Footnotes

1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.ca

Display texts

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

There are various types of decals in the vehicle
whose purpose is to provide important information in a clear and concise way. The importance of these decals is explained as follows,
in descending order of importance.

manual is extremely useful and should be
read after operating the vehicle for the first
time.

Certain pages of this manual contain information in the form of footnotes at the bottom of
the page. This information supplements the
text that the footnote number refers to (a letter
is used if the footnote refers to text in a table).

175 Gordon Baker Road

time, please familiarize yourself with the
information found in the chapters "Your
Driving Environment" and "During Your
Trip."

Decals

G031590

There are several displays in the driver’s field
of vision that show messages generated by
various systems and functions in the vehicle.
These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Manual by being in slightly larger type than the surrounding text and are printed in gray, (for
example: Change doors unlock setting).

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning background, white text/image on a black background. Decals of this type are used to indicate
potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this
type could result in serious injury or death.

Introduction
Important information
Risk of damage to the vehicle

Information

Types of lists used in the manual
Procedures
Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or
actions that must be carried out in a certain
order, are arranged in numbered lists in this
manual.

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black or blue warning background and space
for a message. If the information on decals of
this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle
could result.

G031593

G031592

If there is a series of illustrations associated
with step-by-step instructions, each step
in the procedure is numbered in the same
way as the corresponding illustration.

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black background. These decals provide general information.

NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual
are examples only and are not intended to
be reproductions of the decals actually used
in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indication of how they look and their approximate location in the vehicle. The applicable
information for your particular vehicle can
be found on the respective decals in the
vehicle.

Lists in which letters are used can be found
with series of illustrations in cases where
the order in which the instructions are carried out is not important.
Arrows with or without numbers are used
to indicate the direction of a movement.
Arrows containing letters are used to indicate movement.
If there are no illustrations associated with a
step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure
are indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in general overview illustrations in which
certain components are pointed out. The
corresponding number is also used in the
position list's description of the various
components.

Introduction
Important information
Bullet lists
Bullets are used to differentiate a number of
components/functions/points of information
that can be listed in random order.

NOTE

•

For example:

• Coolant
• Engine oil
Continued
` `This symbol can be found at the lower right
corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page
to indicate that the current topic is continued
on the following page.

Options and accessories
Optional or accessory equipment described in
this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please
note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements.
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication.

•

Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and
without incurring obligation.

•

Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that country's applicable safety and emission
control requirements. In some cases it
may be difficult or impossible to comply
with these requirements. Modifications
to the emission control system(s) may
render your Volvo not certifiable for
legal operation in the U.S., Canada and
other countries.

WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect its drivability
and safety.

WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.

WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as
air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,
adaptive steering columns, and button cell
batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
Special handling may apply for service or
vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.

Introduction
Important information
Shiftlock
When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector
is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the
selector from this position, the ignition must be
in mode II (see page 84) or the engine must
be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the
button on the front side of the gear selector and
move the selector from P (Park).

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started and
driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle
first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several
times and a sound may be audible from the
ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel (see
the illustration on page 273) when the vehicle
is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.
Please note that the fuel filler door will remain
unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the
fuel filler door relocks.

Points to keep in mind

• Do not export your Volvo to another country before investigating that country's
applicable safety and exhaust emission
requirements. In some cases it may be dif-

ficult or impossible to comply with these
requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your
Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in
the U.S., Canada and other countries.

• All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on
the latest product information available at
the time of publication. Please note that
some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in
this manual may not be available in all markets.

• Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.

Crash event data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Introduction
Important information
Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a
number of computers whose task is to continuously control and monitor the vehicle’s operation. They can also register information during
normal driving conditions if they detect a fault
relating to the vehicle’s operation and functionality. Some of the stored information is
required by technicians when carrying out
service and maintenance to enable them to
diagnose and rectify any faults that have
occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to
fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements.
This information may be stored in the vehicle’s
computers for a certain period of time.
Volvo will not contribute to spreading the
above-mentioned information to third parties
without the consent of the vehicle’s owner.
However, due to national legal requirements
and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to
provide information of this type to authorities
such as law enforcement agencies or others
who may assert a legal right to obtain such
information.
Volvo and service and repair facilities with
agreements with Volvo have access to the special technical equipment required in order to
read and interpret the information stored by the
vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsible for
ensuring that the information transmitted to
Volvo during service and maintenance is
stored and handled in a secure manner and

that this handling is done in accordance with
applicable legal requirements. For additional
information, contact:
For additional information, contact:
In the United States
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.ca

Volvo Structural Parts Statement
Volvo has always been and continues to be a
leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers
and manufactures vehicles designed to help
protect vehicle occupants in the event of a collision.
Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a
collision. This energy absorption system
including, but not limited to, structural components such as bumper reinforcement bars,
bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender
aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels
must work together to maintain cabin integrity
and protect the vehicle occupants.
The supplemental restraint system including
but not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags,
and deployment sensors work together with
the above components to provide proper timing for air bag deployment.
Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America
does not support the use of aftermarket, alternative or anything other than original Volvo
parts for collision repair.
In addition Volvo does not support the use or
re-use of structural components from an existing vehicle that has been previously damaged.
Although these parts may appear equivalent, it
is difficult to tell if the parts have been previously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part
has been damaged as a result of a prior colli-

Introduction
Important information
sion. The quality of these used parts may also
have been affected due to environmental
exposure.

Information on the Internet
Additional information about your vehicle is
available at www.volvocars.com.
In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is necessary, which is available as an app for a number of different cell phone and can be downloaded from the App Store or Android Market.

QR code

Introduction
Environment
Volvo and the environment
Volvo is committed to the well being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment,
we care about the environment in which we all
live. Caring for the environment means an
everyday involvement in reducing our environmental impact. Volvo's environmental activities
are based on a holistic view, which means we
consider the overall environmental impact of a
product throughout its complete life cycle. In
this context, design, production, product use,
and recycling are all important considerations.
In production, Volvo has partly or completely
phased out several chemicals including CFCs,
lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and
reduced the number of chemicals used in our
plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into
production a three-way catalytic converter with
a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen
sensor, in 1976. The current version of this
highly efficient system reduces emissions of
harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the
exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and
the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile
manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for
the air conditioning system of all models as far
back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are
bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

continuous environmental refinement of conventional gasoline-powered internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at
advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on
the environment. To reduce your vehicle's
environmental impact, you can:

• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.

Recycling
As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recycled in an environmentally sound way. Almost
the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that
reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested
to contact a Volvo retailer for information about
approved and certified recycling facilities.

FSC

Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires.

• Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.

• Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.

• See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indicator) light illuminates, or stays on after the
vehicle has started.

• Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc.

• When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo
car care products are formulated to be
environmentally friendly.

The FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in this
publication comes from FSC certified forests
and other responsible sources.

Introduction
Important warnings
Driver distraction
A driver has a responsibility to do everything
possible to ensure his or her own safety and
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions
is part of that responsibility.
Driver distraction results from driver activities
that are not directly related to controlling the
vehicle in the driving environment. Your new
Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many feature-rich entertainment and communication
systems. These include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You may also own other
portable electronic devices for your own convenience. When used properly and safely, they
enrich the driving experience. Improperly used,
any of these could cause a distraction.
For all of these systems, we want to provide the
following warning that reflects the strong Volvo
concern for your safety. Never use these devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way that
distracts you from the task of driving safely.
Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In
addition to this general warning, we offer the
following guidance regarding specific newer
features that may be found in your vehicle:

• Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while the
vehicle is moving.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to your
travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.

• Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use
quicker and simpler.

• Never use portable computers or personal
digital assistants while the vehicle is moving.

Accessory installation

• We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved
accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

• Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
Additionally, an inexperienced installer
may not be familiar with some of your car's
systems.

• Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if you
install accessories that Volvo has not tested, or if you allow accessories to be installed by someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.

• Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for more warranty
information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that
may result from the installation of non-genuine accessories.

• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician knows where
accessories may and may not be safely
installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please
consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.

Occupant safety......................................................................................
Reporting safety defects.........................................................................
Seat belts ...............................................................................................
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...................................................
Occupant Weight Sensor .......................................................................
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ...................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS...................................................
Rollover Protection System (ROPS) .......................................................
Crash mode............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
Child restraint systems...........................................................................
Infant seats..............................................................................................
Convertible seats....................................................................................
Booster cushions....................................................................................
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................................................................
Top tether anchors..................................................................................
Integrated booster cushion.....................................................................
Child safety locks....................................................................................

16
17
18
21
26
30
32
33
35
36
37
40
42
44
46
47
48
49
52

SAFETY

01 Safety
01

Occupant safety
Volvo's concern for safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern
dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled
off the production line. Three-point seat belts
(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energyabsorbing impact zones were designed into
Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable
or required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety
features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety. We also want to know if you ever
have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us
in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how
old you are but rather on:

• How well you see.
• Your ability to concentrate.
• How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.

• Never drink and drive.
• If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects
on your driving abilities.

• Take a driver-retraining course.
• Have your eyes checked regularly.
• Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.

• Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.

• Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with
regard to stopping distance.

• Never send text messages while driving.
• Refrain from using or minimize the use of a
cell phone while driving.

Recall information
Information regarding recalls or other service
campaigns is available on our website at
www.volvocars.com/us/. Select the tab YOUR
VOLVO and the heading RECALL INFORMATION will be displayed at the lower left side of
the screen.

01 Safety
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

http://www.safercar.gov

If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at

Volvo strongly recommends that if
your vehicle is covered under a service campaign, safety or emission
recall or similar action, it should be
completed as soon as possible.
Please check with your local retailer
or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
if your vehicle is covered under these
conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:

Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars
of Canada Corp.
Transport Canada can be contacted at:
1-800-333-0510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
Fax: 1-819-994-3372
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z
0A1

http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).

1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from:

01 Safety
01

Seat belts
General information

in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces
exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.

Fastening a seat belt
Buckling
Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is
heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided
that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

NOTE
Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)
is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,
which is designed to help keep the seat belt
taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is
pulled out as far as possible. If this is done,
a sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible, which is normal, and the seat belt
will be pulled taut and locked in place. This
function is automatically disabled when the
seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.

Seat belt retractor
The seat belt retractor will lock up in the following situations:
Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belts should always be worn by all occupants of your vehicle. Children should be properly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster
seat determined by age, weight and height.
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
front seat of a vehicle.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory
for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners
All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners
that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the
front or side impact airbags deploy, and in certain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts
also include a tension reducing device which,

•
•
•
•
•

if the belt is pulled out rapidly
during braking and acceleration
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
when driving in turns
if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is activated

See also page 38 for information about using
a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a
child seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:

• The belt should not be twisted or turned.
• The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing against
the abdomen).

• Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder
and lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt
To remove the seat belt, press the red section
on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the
vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully
after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the
belt back into the retractor slot.

01 Safety
Seat belts

Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism
function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull
rapidly on the strap.

WARNING

•

Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.

•

Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental
effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a collision.

•

The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be taut
in order to function properly.

•

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.

WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion
of the belt under the arm, behind the back
or otherwise out of position. Such use could
cause injury in the event of an accident. As
seat belts lose much of their strength when
exposed to violent stretching, they should
be replaced after any collision, even if they
appear to be undamaged.

Seat belt reminder

G017726

Seat belt maintenance

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audible
signal, an indicator light near the rearview mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel that
alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their
seat belts. The audible signal and indicator
light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the
time the ignition is switched on, regardless of
whether or not the seat belts are fastened.
If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the
vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and
warning light will be active for a total of 6 seconds.

Rear seats
The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two
additional functions:

01 Safety
01

Seat belts
• It provides information about which seat

Seat belt use during pregnancy

a distance as possible between their belly and
the steering wheel.

belts are fastened in the rear seat. A message will appear in the information display
when a belt is being used. This message
will disappear after approximately 6 seconds or can be erased by pressing the
OK button on the left steering wheel lever.

Child seats
Please refer to page 40 for information on
securing child seats with the seat belts.

occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled
his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in
motion. A visual and audible signal will be
given. These signals will stop when the
seat belt has been re-buckled or can be
stopped by pressing the OK button.

• The message Unbelted in rear seat will
appear in the information display if one of
the rear doors has been opened.
The message in the information display can
always be accessed, even if it has been erased,
by pressing the OK button to display stored
messages.

G020998

• It also provides a reminder if one of the

The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap
section should lay flat over the thighs and as
low as possible under the belly. It must never
be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack
from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the
body without any twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means they must
be able to easily operate the foot pedals and
steering wheel). Within this context, they
should strive to position the seat with as large

01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
General information

properly, the general warning symbol illuminates and a text message will be displayed.
See also page 78 and page 80 for more
information about indicator and warning symbols.

WARNING

•

Warning symbols in the instrument panel

As an enhancement to the three-point seat
belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS
consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags, side impact airbags, a front passenger
occupant weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of these systems are monitored by the
SRS control module. An SRS warning light in
the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in modes I or II,
and will normally go out after approximately
6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system.

•

If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

WARNING
If your vehicle has become flood-damaged
in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle), do not
attempt to start the vehicle or insert the
remote key into the ignition slot before disconnecting the battery (see below). This
may cause airbag deployment which could
result in serious injury. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs.
Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Follow the instructions for manually
overriding the shiftlock system on page
123.

Where applicable, a text message will also be
displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning

01 Safety
01

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Front airbags

The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove compartment.

G018665

WARNING

The front airbag system
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the
protection intended, seat belts must be worn
at all times.
The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators,
causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen
gas.

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also
deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second.
The location of the front airbags is indicated by
SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
pad and above the glove compartment, and by
decals on both sun visors and on the front and
far right side of the dash.
The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.

•

The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For
maximum protection, wear seat belts at
all times. Be aware that no system can
prevent all possible injuries that may
occur in an accident.

•

Never drive with your hands on the
steering wheel pad/airbag housing.

•

The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment
occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment
and depending on variables such as
seating position, one may experience
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other
injuries as a result from deployment of
one or both of the airbags.

•

When installing any accessory equipment, make sure that the front airbag
system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction.

01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Front airbag deployment

• The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and
object impacted. The airbags may also
deploy in certain non-frontal collisions
where rapid deceleration occurs.

• The SRS sensors, which trigger the front
airbags, are designed to react to both the
impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient for
the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags
to be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.

• If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed
object at a low speed, the front airbags will
not necessarily deploy.

• Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the
rear or in a rollover situation.

• The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.

•

WARNING

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened1.

1-800-458-1552

Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.

175 Gordon Baker Road

The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure.

www.volvocars.ca

www.volvocars.us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255

Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo customer support:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914

See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.

01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
NOTE

•

Airbag decals

Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners activate. Some noise occurs and a small
amount of powder is released. The
release of the powder may appear as
smoke-like matter. This is a normal
characteristic and does not indicate fire.
Volvo's front airbags use special sensors that are integrated with the front
seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether
or not the seat belt is being used, as well
as the severity of the collision.

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is
more severe, the airbags are triggered
at full capacity.

Passenger's side airbag decal

WARNING

•

Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat.

•

Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat,
sit leaning toward the instrument panel
or otherwise sit out of position.

•

The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the
seat back with the seat belt properly
fastened.

•

Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.

G008335

01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

WARNING

•

No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the air
bag hatch (the area above the glove
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment (see the illustration
on page 22).

•

There should be no loose articles, such
as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or
dashboard area.

•

Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

•

Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

01 Safety
01

Occupant Weight Sensor
General information

The OWS works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly seated occupant and determine if
the passenger's side front airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
inflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when:

• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
G017724

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults
and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any
vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and
be properly restrained for their size and weight.
For child safety recommendations,see
page 38.
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
under certain conditions.

or has small/medium objects in the front
seat,

• the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions,

• the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,

• the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,

• a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,

• a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on
to remind you that the passenger's side front

airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead
console, near the base of the rearview mirror.

NOTE
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds
while the system performs a self-diagnostic
test.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

• The OWS indicator light will stay on
• The SRS warning light (see page 21) will
come on and stay on

• The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service
urgent will be displayed in the information
display.

WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the passenger's side front airbag will not deploy in
the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS
system and Occupant Weight Sensor
should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.

01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
WARNING

•

Never try to open, remove, or repair any
components in the OWS system. This
could result in system malfunction.
Maintenance or repairs should only be
carried out by an a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could
reduce pressure on the seat cushion,
which might interfere with the OWS system's function.

Passenger's seat
occupancy status

OWS indicator light
status

Passenger's side
front airbag status

Seat unoccupied

OWS indicator light
lights up.

Passenger's
side front
airbag disabled

BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain
off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that
the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens:

• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.

•

Seat occupied by low
weight
occupant/
objectA

OWS indicator light
lights up

Seat occupied by
heavy occupant/object

OWS indicator light is
not lit

Passenger's
side front
airbag disabled
Passenger's
side front
airbag enabled

Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do
not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled
unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is
any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag in the event
of a collision anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the
front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR-

Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.

• If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate
OWS malfunction.

Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
any way to accommodate a disability, for
example by altering or adapting the driver's or
front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at:

01 Safety
01

Occupant Weight Sensor
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

WARNING

•

Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
In Canada

•

The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the
OWS system's function.

•

The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more
pressure on the passenger than normal.
This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario
M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255

No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the
front passenger's seat. If a child is
seated in the front passenger's seat
with any additional weight, this extra
weight could cause the OWS system to
enable the airbag, which might cause it
to deploy in the event of a collision,
thereby injuring the child.

WARNING

•

Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to
follow these instructions could
adversely affect the system's function
and result in serious injury to the occupant of the front passenger's seat:

•

The full weight of the front seat passenger should always be on the seat cushion. The passenger should never lift
him/herself off the seat cushion using
the armrest in the door or the center
console, by pressing the feet on the
floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat
cushion, or by pressing against the
backrest in a way that reduces pressure
on the seat cushion. This could cause
OWS to disable the front, passenger's
side airbag.

01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING

•

Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way
that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
occurs between the object and the front
seat, other than as a direct result of the
correct use of the Automatic Locking
Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 38).

•

No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.

01 Safety
01

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags
General information

NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by
the impact. The airbags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.

G024377

G032949

Components in the SIPS airbag system

Driver's side SIPS airbag

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front
seats only)

The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of
certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.

G024378

As an enhancement to the structural side
impact protection built into your vehicle, it is
also equipped with Side Impact Protection
System (SIPS) airbags.

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by the
impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.

This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into the
outboard sides of both front seat backrests,
and electronic sensors/wiring.

01 Safety
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

WARNING

•

The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat
belt system. It is not designed to deploy
during collisions from the front or rear of
the vehicle or in rollover situations.

•

The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.

•

No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to
or installed near the SIPS airbag system
or in the area affected by SIPS airbag
deployment.

•

Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

•

In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.

•

Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.

01 Safety
01

Inflatable Curtain (IC)
General information

This system consists of inflatable curtains
located along the sides of the roof liners,
stretching from the center of both front side
windows to the rear edge of the rear side door
windows. It is designed to help protect the
heads of the occupants of the front seats and
the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag System
(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS
airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE
If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains
inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

WARNING

•

The IC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is not
designed to deploy during collisions
from the rear of the vehicle.

•

Never try to open or repair any components of the IC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

•

Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
handles. This could impede deployment
of the Inflatable Curtain.

•

The cargo area and rear seat should not
be loaded to a level higher than 2 in.
(5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear
side windows. Objects placed higher
than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain.

WARNING
In order for the IC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and both
outboard rear seat occupants should sit in
an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and
children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats.
Children must never be allowed in the front
passenger seat, see page 38 for guidelines. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an
accident.

01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS
General information

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) –
front seats only
The WHIPS system consists of specially
designed hinges and brackets on the front seat
backrests designed to help absorb some of the
energy generated in a collision from the rear
(when the vehicle is rear-ended).
In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges
and brackets of the front seat backrests are
designed to change position slightly to allow
the backrest/head restraint to help support the
occupant's head before moving slightly rearward. This movement helps absorb some of
the forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

•

The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in
your vehicle. For this system to function
properly, the three-point seat belt must
be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that
may occur in an accident.

•

The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear,
depending on the crash severity, angle
and speed.

WARNING

•

Occupants in the front seats must never
sit out of position. The occupant's back
must be as upright as comfort allows
and be against the seat back with the
seat belt properly fastened.

•

If your vehicle has been involved in a
rear-end collision, the front seat backrests must be inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician,
even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Certain components in the
WHIPS system may need to be
replaced.

•

Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself.

01 Safety
01

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS
WARNING

•

Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system.

•

If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system.

WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child seat could impede the function of
the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded
down, the occupied front seats must be
adjusted forward so that they do not touch
the folded rear seat.

01 Safety
Rollover Protection System (ROPS)

Volvo’s Rollover Protection System utilizes the
Roll Stability Control (RSC) function, which is
designed to help minimize the risk of a rollover
in emergency maneuvers or if a skid should
occur.
RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers
the amount of change in the lateral angle at
which the vehicle is leaning. Using this information, RSC calculates the likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent risk of a rollover,
the Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) is activated, power to the engine is
cut and the brakes are applied to one or more
of the wheels until the vehicle regains stability.
For additional information on DSTC, see
page 134.

WARNING
The vehicle’s stability systems, including
ROPS and RSC, do not replace the driver’s
responsibility for operating the vehicle in a
safe manner. Speed and driving style
should always be adapted to the current
road, traffic and weather conditions. Posted
speed limits should always be respected.

01 Safety
01

Crash mode
function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for one of the safety systems, the
brake system, etc.

WARNING

•

•
Driving after a collision
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,
the text Safety mode See manual may
appear in the information display. This indicates that the vehicle's functionality has been
reduced.

•

Never attempt to repair the vehicle
yourself or to reset the electrical system
after the vehicle has displayed Safety
mode See manual. This could result in
injury or improper system function.
Restoring the vehicle to normal operating status should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
After Safety mode See manual has
been displayed, if you detect the odor
of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel
leakage, do not attempt to start the
vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.

NOTE
This text can only be shown if the display is
undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system is intact.

Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one
or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side
airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of
the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The
collision may have damaged an important

Attempting to start the vehicle
If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is
no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the
vehicle. To do so:
1. Remove the remote key from the ignition
slot and open the driver's door. If a message is displayed that the ignition is on,
press the start button.

2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the
remote key in the ignition slot.
3. Try to start the vehicle.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven
and must be towed. Concealed faults may
make the vehicle difficult to control.

Moving the vehicle
If the message Normal mode is displayed
when Safety mode See manual is no longer
displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully
from its present position, if for example, it is
blocking traffic. It should, however, not be
moved farther than is absolutely necessary.

WARNING
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable
after Safety mode has been set, it should
not be driven or towed (pulled by another
vehicle). There may be concealed damage
that could make it difficult or impossible to
control. The vehicle should be transported
on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/
repairs.

01 Safety
Child safety
Children should be seated safely
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/
LATCH attachments, which make it more convenient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
Such child restraint systems can help protect
children in vehicles in the event of an accident
only if they are used properly. However, children could be endangered in a crash if the child
restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions
for your child restraint can result in your child
striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
an unrestrained person. The child could also be
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver
or impact. The same can also happen if the
infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.
Other occupants should also be properly

restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring
or increasing the injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your state or province. Recent accident
statistics have shown that children are safer in
rear seating positions than front seating positions when properly restrained. A child restraint
system can help protect a child in a vehicle.
Here's what to look for when selecting a child
restraint system:
It should have a label certifying that it meets
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada,
CMVSS 213.
Make sure the child restraint system is
approved for the child's height, weight and
development – the label required by the standard or regulation, or instructions for infant
restraints, typically provide this information.

When a child has outgrown the child safety
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
help protect the child here is to place the child
on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly
located on the hips (see the illustration on page
46). Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on
the child's age and/or size. Please check local
regulations.
A specially designed and tested booster cushion and backrest can be obtained from your
Volvo retailer.
USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs.
(15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm)
in height
Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.
(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm)
in height

In using any child restraint system, we urge you
to carefully look over the instructions that are
provided with the restraint. Be sure you understand them and can use the device properly
and safely in this vehicle. A misused child
restraint system can result in increased injuries
for both the infant or child and other occupants
in the vehicle.
``

01 Safety
01

Child safety
WARNING

•

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened.
On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure to these high temperatures
for even a short period of time can
cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.

Child seat should always be registered. See
page 39 for more information.

When attaching the seat belt to a child
seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the
buckle (lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around
the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible at this time and is normal. The belt will
now be locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each
seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the
seat belt taut.

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend that
children who have outgrown these devices
sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly
fastened.

Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit
in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really.
A front airbag is a very powerful device
designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in
the front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo
has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our
part. But we need your help. Please remember
to put your children in the back seat, and
buckle them up.

Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:

• Always wear your seat belt.
• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a threepoint seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle.

• Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
in the vehicle be properly restrained.

• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back

01 Safety
Child safety

seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.

• Drive safely!
Child restraint registration and recalls
Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child restraint
to be reached in a recall. To stay informed
about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out
and return the registration card that comes
with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall
information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.
In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child
Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

01 Safety
01

Child restraint systems

Convertible seat

G023269

G022847

G022840

Child restraints

Booster cushion

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and
booster cushions. They are classified according to the child's age and size.
The following section provides general information on securing a child restraint using a
three-point seat belt. Refer to page 47–48
for information on securing a child restraint
using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top
tether anchorages.

WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this position.

WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information
on securing the restraint.

01 Safety
Child restraint systems

WARNING

•

When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or collision.

•

A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.

01 Safety
01

Infant seats
WARNING

G023270

G022844

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat

NOTE
Refer to page 47–48 for information on
securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.

WARNING

•

An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.

•

The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.

A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this position.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.

G023271

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.

Fasten the seat belt

01 Safety

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.

6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat
belt path to ensure that it is held securely
in place by the seat belt.

NOTE

G022850

G022846

Infant seats

WARNING

The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.

It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in any direction along the seat belt path.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic
locking function will be audible at this time
and is normal. The seat belt should now be
locked in place.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

01 Safety
01

Convertible seats
Securing a convertible seat with a seat
belt

G018630

G022847

WARNING

Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat

NOTE
Refer to pages 47 and 48 for information
on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
of the vehicle.

•

Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only.

•

A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
unless there is adequate space for safe
installation.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.

01 Safety
Convertible seats

G022850

G022848

time and is normal. The seat belt should
now be locked in place.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.

G022849

Fasten the seat belt
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

6. Push and pull the convertible seat along
the seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this

It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in any direction along the seat belt path.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity
of an accident were to cause the airbag to
inflate, this could lead to serious injury or
death to a child seated in this position.

The convertible seat can be removed by
unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
completely.

01 Safety
01

Booster cushions

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion

Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

G022852

G022851

Securing a booster cushion

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

•

The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.

•

The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.

•

The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the
arm.

01 Safety
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors

3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/
LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
child seats are located in the rear, outboard
seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the
anchor positions as shown. To access the
anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate
the anchors by feel. Always follow your child
seat manufacturer's installation instructions,
and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
and top tethers whenever possible.

To access the anchors
1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by
feel.

G018631

WARNING
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to
the child restraint system's manual for
weight and size ratings.

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors

NOTE

•

The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower
anchors. When installing a child
restraint in this position, attach the
restraint's top tether strap (if it is so
equipped) to the top tether anchorage
point and secure the restraint with the
vehicle's center seat belt.
Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use
both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and
top tethers whenever possible.

WARNING

•

Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustration).
If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not be
properly secured in the event of a collision.

•

The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
child seats positioned in the outboard
seating positions. These anchors are
not certified for use with any child
restraint that is positioned in the center
seating position. When securing a child
restraint in the center seating position,
use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

01 Safety
01

Top tether anchors
Child restraint anchorages

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions for information on securing the
child seat.

WARNING

•

Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap
should be routed beneath the head
restraint.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts or harnesses. The
anchorages are not able to withstand
excessive forces on them in the event of
collision if full harness seat belts or adult
seat belts are installed to them. An adult
who uses a belt anchored in a child
restraint anchorage runs a great risk of
suffering severe injuries should a collision occur.

•

Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
interfere with the proper use of the top
tether strap.

NOTE
On models equipped with the optional
cargo area cover, this cover should be
removed before a child seat is attached to
the child restraint anchors.

Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top
tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are
located on the rear side of the backrests.

Securing a child seat
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and attach it to the anchor.
3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is
not equipped with lower tether straps, or
the restraint is used in the center seating
position, follow instructions for securing a
child restraint using the Automatic Locking
Retractor seat belt (see page 38).
4. Firmly tension all straps.

01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion
Integrated two-stage booster
cushion*1
Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions
are located in the outboard seating positions.
These booster cushions have been specially
designed to help safeguard children in the rear
seat. They should be stowed (folded down into
the seat cushion) when not in use. When using
an integrated booster cushion, the child must
be secured with the vehicle's three-point seat
belt.

in proper positioning of the shoulder strap,
then the child should be placed in a properly
secured child restraint (see page 40). The
shoulder belt must never be placed behind the
child's back or under the arm.

Use these booster cushions only with
children whose weight is between:
• Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg)
• Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg)
and whose height is between:
• Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 – 140 cm)
• Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm)

Incorrect seating position: the child's head is
above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is
not across the collarbone

Before driving, check that:

• The integrated two-stage booster cushion
Correct seating position: child's head is below the
head restraint and the shoulder belt is across the
collarbone

In Canada, Transport Canada's
weight recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs
(18 – 36 kg).
The booster cushions are designed to raise the
child higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses
over the child's collarbone, not over the child's
neck. If using a booster cushion does not result
1

is set in the correct position according to
the child's height and weight (see the table
below) and is locked in position.

Weight

Height

Stage 1

Stage 2

48 – 80 lbs

33 – 55 lbs

22 – 36 kg

15 – 25 kg

45 – 55 in.

37 – 47 in.

115 – 140 cm

95 – 120 cm

Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 Safety
01

Integrated booster cushion
• That the seat belt is properly positioned
and is taut.

• The shoulder section of the seat belt is
across the child's collarbone, not over the
neck.

• The lap section of the seat belt is across
the child's hips and not the abdomen.

Using an integrated booster cushion
Stage 1

Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2)
to release the booster cushion.
Press the booster cushion rearward to lock
it in position.

Stage 2

With the booster cushion in the stage 1
position, press the button (see the arrow in
illustration 1).
Lift the front edge of the booster cushion
and press it rearward toward the backrest
to lock it in position.

01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion
Stowing the two-stage integrated
booster cushion

WARNING

NOTE
The booster cushion cannot be moved from
the stage 2 (upper) position to the stage 1
(lower) position. It must first be folded down
completely to the stowed position, and then
adjusted to stage 1.

Pull the handle forward to release the
booster cushion.
Press down on the center of the booster
cushion to return it to the stowed position.

NOTE
The booster cushion must be in the stowed
position before the rear seat backrests are
folded down.

CAUTION
Be sure there are no loose objects under the
booster cushion before it is stowed.

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
occur
Follow all instructions on the
booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual.
MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER
CUSHION IS SECURELY
LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS
SEATED.
• Use this booster cushion only with children whose height and weight are
within the permitted limits shown in the
table (see page 49).

•

In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied,
the entire booster cushion and seat belt
must be replaced. The booster cushion
should also be replaced if it is badly
worn or damaged in any way. This work
should be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician only.

The booster cushion can be folded down completely (stowed) from either the stage 1 or stage
2 positions.

01 Safety
01

Child safety locks

G021077

Child safety locks

Child safety locks – rear doors
The controls are located on the rear door
jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a
screwdriver to adjust these controls.
The rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the slot is in the horizontal position.
The rear doors can be opened from the
inside when the slot is in the vertical position.

01 Safety
01

Remote key and key blade.....................................................................
Keyless drive...........................................................................................
Locks.......................................................................................................
Alarm.......................................................................................................

56
64
67
70

LOCKS AND ALARM

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade

Introduction

Detachable key blade

Two remote keys or optional Personal Car
Communicators (PCC) are provided with your
vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors
and tailgate, and also function as ignition keys
to start the vehicle or operate electrical components. The remote keys contain detachable
metal key blades for manually locking or
unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment. The visible ends of these key blades
are unique to make it easier to identify "your"
remote key. Up to six remotes can be programmed for use on the same vehicle.

Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable
metal key blade for mechanically locking or
unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment. See page 61 for more information
on the key blade. The key blades have a unique
code, which is used if new ones need to be
produced. This code is available at an authorized Volvo retailer.

The PCCs have enhanced functionality compared with the standard remote key.

If either of the remote keys is lost, the other
should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer.
As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost
remote key must be erased from the system.

NOTE
In the remainder of this chapter, all references to the remote key also pertain to the
PCC unless otherwise stated.

WARNING
Never leave the remote key in the ignition
slot if children are to remain in the vehicle.

The visible ends of these key blades are unique
to make it easier to identify "your" remote key.

Loss of a remote key

NOTE
Additional or duplicate remote control keys
can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo
Retailer.
You can also obtain additional or duplicate
remote control keys from certain independent repair facilities and locksmiths that are
qualified to make remote control keys. Each
key must be programmed to work with your
vehicle.
California Only:
A list of independent repair facilities and/or
locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and
code replacement keys can be found:

•

on the Volvo website at
http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys

•

by calling Volvo Customer Care at
1-800-458-1552

The number of registered keys for the vehicle
can be found by pressing MY CAR and going
into Information Number of keys. See
page 191 for a description of the menu system.
USA-5WK49264

See page 84 for more information on the various ignition modes.

FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO
5WK49236
FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO
5WK49233
FCC ID:KR55WK49233
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Canada-5WK49264
IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO
5WK49236
IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266
IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO
5WK49233
IC:267T-5WK49233
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

Key memory: door mirrors and driver's
seat
The position of the side door mirrors and power
driver's seat* are stored in the remote keys
when the vehicle is locked. The next time the

driver's door is unlocked with the same remote
key and the door is opened within 2 minutes,
the power driver's seat and side door mirrors
will automatically move to the position that they
were in when the doors were most recently
locked with the same remote key. If the seat/
mirrors have not been readjusted since the
vehicle was locked, they will already be in the
position stored in that particular remote key
and will not move. See page 87 for more
information. See also page 88 for more information on this feature.
This feature can be activated or deactivated in
the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR and
going into Settings Car settings Car
key memory. See page 191 for a description
of the menu system.
See also page 64 for information regarding
vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

Confirmation will only be given when all doors
and the tailgate are properly closed and
locked.

NOTE
If you do not receive confirmation when
locking the vehicle, check whether a door or
the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has been
turned off in the menu.

Unlocking confirmation

• The turn signals will flash twice and the
door mirrors will fold* out.

Making a setting
Different alternatives for locking/unlocking
confirmation can be selected in the menus by
pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel.

• To activate visual confirmation: go to

Confirmation when locking/unlocking
the vehicle
Settings can be made in the menu system for
audible and visual confirmation when the vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With these
functions activated, the following will occur
when the vehicle is locked/unlocked:

Locking confirmation

• The turn signals flash once, an audible signal sounds and the door mirrors will fold*
in.

Settings Car settings Light
settings and select Door lock
confirmation light and/or Unlock
confirmation light by pressing OK/
MENU.

• To activate audible confirmation: go to
Settings Car settings Lock
settings and select Audible
confirmation by pressing OK/MENU.
See page 191 for a description of the menu
system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)
02

Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle
contains a coded transponder. The code in the
key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition
slot where it is compared to the code stored in
the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start
only with a properly coded key. If you misplace
a key, take the other keys to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure. The following messages (which may appear in the instrument panel display) are related to the immobilizer:

Message

Meaning

Insert car key

Remote key not recognized during start.
Try to start the vehicle again.

Car key not found

PCC with keyless
drive only. Remote
key not recognized
during start. Try to
start the vehicle
again.
If the problem continues, insert the
remote key into the
ignition slot and try
to start the vehicle
again.

Immobilizer Try
start again

Remote key fault
during start. Contact
an authorized Volvo
workshop.

CAUTION
Never use force when inserting the remote
key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot
be started if the transponder is damaged.

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following condition: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
See page 116 for information on starting the
vehicle.

Replacing the battery in the remote key
The batteries should be replaced if:

• The information symbol illuminates and

•

Low battery in remote control. Please
change batteries. is shown in the display
and/or
if the locks do not react after several
attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

NOTE
The remote key's range is normally approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.

See page 62 for information about replacing
the battery.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Remote key/Personal Car
Communicator (PCC) - common
functions*

After a short pause, press the Unlock button a
second time within 10 seconds to unlock the
other doors and the tailgate.

This function can be changed so that all doors
unlock at the same time by pressing My Car
and going to Settings Car settings
Lock settings Change doors unlock
setting. See page 191 for a description of the
menu system.
Approach lighting – As you approach the
vehicle, press the button on the remote key to
light the interior lighting, parking lights, license
plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*.

Personal Car Communicator (PCC)*

Lock
Standard remote key

Unlock

Lock

Approach lighting

Unlock

Tailgate unlock

Approach lighting

Panic alarm

Tailgate unlock
Panic alarm

These lights will switch off automatically after
30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 191 for a
description of the menu system.

Buttons on the remote
Lock – Press the Lock button on the
remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate.
The turn signals will flash once to confirm locking.

Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice
within several seconds to disarm the alarm
system and optional movement sensor (the
alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go
out), and unlock only the tailgate. Pressing this
button for several seconds also opens the tailgate on models equipped with the optional
power tailgate.

Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the
remote once to unlock the driver's door.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
NOTE
02

As an added safety precaution, the parking
lights will come on automatically for a short
period when the tailgate has been opened.

After closing, the tailgate will not automatically
relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the
alarm.
See also the section "Unlocking the tailgate
from the passenger compartment."
Panic alarm – This button can be used to
attract attention during emergency situations.
To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this
button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice
within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will
be activated. The panic alarm will stop automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds
and press the button again.

NOTE
Buildings or other obstacles may interfere
with the function of the remote key. The
vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with
the key blade, see page 61.

If the remote key is removed from the vehicle
while the engine is running or if the ignition is
in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed,
a message will appear in the instrument panel
display and there will be an audible signal.
When the remote key is returned to the vehicle,
the message will be erased and the audible
signal will stop after one of the following has
been done:

• The remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot

• The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph

Information button
Indicator lights
Pressing the information button provides certain information about the vehicle with the help
of the indicator lights.

(30 km/h)

• The OK button on the left steering wheel

The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehicle.

Range
The remote key has a range of approximately
60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.

Unique functions—PCC*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

lever is pressed

Using the information button
1. Press the information button

2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequentially for approximately 7 seconds to indicate that the PCC is receiving information
from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are
pressed during this 7-second period,
transmission of information to the PCC will
be interrupted.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
NOTE
If none of the indicator lights flash when the
information button has been pressed several times from different places in relation to
the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo
service technician.

Range
The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a
range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the
vehicle.

NOTE

•
The indicator lights provide information
according to the illustration:

•

The approach lighting, panic alarm, and
the functions controlled by the information button have a range of approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle.
Radio waves, buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of
the PCC.

If the vehicle does not provide confirmation
when a button has been pressed, try moving
closer and pressing the button again.

Outside of the PCC´s range

Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly
locked.
Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not
locked.
Steady red light: the alarm has been triggered since the vehicle was most recently
locked.
Both red lights flash alternatively: the alarm
was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.

If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft
(100 m) from the vehicle when the information
button is pressed, no new information will be
received. The PCC most recently used to lock
or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's
most recently received status. The indicator
lights will not flash when the information button
is pressed while the PCC is out of range.

NOTE
If none of the indicator lights illuminate when
the information button is pressed, this may
be because the most recent transmission
between the vehicle and the PCC was interrupted or impeded by buildings or other
objects.

Keyless drive
Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal
Car Communicator have the keyless drive
function, see page 64 for detailed information.

Detachable key blade
The key blade can be removed from the remote
key. When removed, the key blade can be used
to:

• Lock/unlock the driver's door if the remote
key is not functioning properly

• Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see
page 68)

• Override the transmission's shiftlock system (see page 123)

• Block access to the glove compartment

If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock
the vehicle, only the one used most recently will
show the correct locking status.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Removing the key blade

wise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock
the driver's door only.

NOTE
After unlocking the driver's door with the
key blade, opening the door will trigger the
alarm.

To disable the alarm:
Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This
also applies to vehicles equipped with the
optional keyless drive.
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.
Pull the key blade straight out of the remote
key.

Reinserting the key blade in the remote
key

Replacing batteries in the remote key/
PCC
The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC
should be replaced if:

• The information symbol lights up and a text
appears in the information display.

1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.

and/or

2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

• the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react

3. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.

when a button on the remote key/PCC is
pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m)
from the vehicle.

Unlocking the doors with the detached
key blade
Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clock-

Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the
remote key, two batteries in the PCC)

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Opening the remote key/PCC

PCC (two batteries)

Slide the spring loaded catch to the
side.

1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old batteries.

Pull the key blade straight out of the
remote key.

2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side
upward.

Insert a small screwdriver in the hole
behind the spring loaded catch and carefully pry up the cover.

3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery.
Insert the second new battery on top of the
plastic spacer, with the + side downward.

Re-assembling the remote key

NOTE
Turn the remote key with the buttons
upward so that the batteries do not fall out
when the cover is removed.

Replacing the batteries

CAUTION

1. Press the remote key's cover into place.
2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.
3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
4. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.
Old batteries should be properly recycled.

When handling batteries, avoid touching
their contact surfaces as this could result in
poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–)
sides.

Remote key (one battery)
1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery.
2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward.

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive

Keyless drive* (models with Personal
Car Communicator only)

NOTE

•

The gear selector must in the P position
before the vehicle can be locked and
the alarm can be armed.

•

The buttons on the keyless drive remote
key can also be used to lock and unlock
the vehicle, see page 59 for more information.

Keyless locking and unlocking

Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle
have the keyless function, and additional ones
can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six PCCs.
Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft
(1.5 meters)

This system makes it possible to unlock and
lock the vehicle without having to press any
buttons on the Personal Car Communicators
(PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless
drive remote key in your possession to operate
the central locking system.

The red rings in the illustration indicate the area
around the vehicle that is within range of the
keyless drive antennas.

Unlocking the vehicle

• A keyless drive remote key must be on the
same side of the vehicle as the door to be
opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters)
of the door's lock or the tailgate (see the
shaded areas in the illustration).

• Pull a door handle to unlock and open the
door or pull the tailgate opening control.
The number of doors that are unlocked at the
same time can be set in the vehicle's menu
system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings
Lock settings Keyless entry. See page
191 for a description of the menu system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Unlocking the vehicle with the key blade

Keyless drive keyhole cover

If the PCC does not function normally (weak
battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked with
the detachable key blade. See page 62 for
instructions on detaching the key blade from
the PCC. To access the keyhole in the driver's
door:
1. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)
straight up in the hole on the underside of
the keyhole cover.
> The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is
pushed upward.
2. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to
unlock the driver's door only. This will trig-

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
ger the alarm. Press the remote key into the
ignition slot to turn off the alarm.
3. Press the cover back into place after the
door has been unlocked.

Locking the vehicle

• When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in

When at least one PCC has been returned to
the car, the message will be erased in the display and the audible signal will stop when:

your possession and lock any door, the
position of the driver's seat and door mirrors will be stored in the seat's memory.

• A door has been opened and closed
• The PCC has been inserted in the ignition

Keyless drive remote key and driver's
seat/door mirror memory

• The next time a door is opened by a person
with the same PCC in his/her possession,
the driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they
were in when the door was most recently
locked.

slot

• The OK button (see page 189 for the location of this button) has been pressed.

CAUTION

•

Keyless drive remote keys should never
be left in the vehicle. In the event of a
break-in, a remote found in the vehicle
could make it possible to start the
engine.

•

Electromagnetic fields or metal
obstructions can interfere with the keyless drive system. The remote key
should never be placed closer than
approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to cell
phones, metallic objects or e.g., stored
in a metal briefcase.

NOTE

Models with keyless drive have a button on the
outside door handles

The doors and the tailgate can be locked by
pressing the lock button in any of the outside
door handles.

NOTE
On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector
must be in the Park (P) position, all doors
and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle
can be locked.

If several people carrying PCCs approach
the vehicle at the same time, the driver's
seat and door mirrors will assume the positions they were in for the person who opens
the driver's door.

See also page 87 for information on adjusting
and storing the seat's position in the seat memory.

Keyless drive information messages
If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle
while the engine is running or if the ignition is
in mode II (see page 84) and all of the doors
are closed, a message will appear in the instrument panel display and an audible signal will
sound.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
02

Location of the keyless drive antennas

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Siemens VDO
5WK48891
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
For Automobile Use
Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,
267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891
NOTE
This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.

WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should
not allow the pacemaker to come closer
than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless
drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker
and the keyless drive system.

The keyless drive system has a number of
antennas located at various points in the vehicle.
On the tailgate, near the wiper motor
Left rear door handle
Under the floor of the cargo area, near the
rear seat
Right rear door handle
Under the rear section of the center console
Under the front section of the center console

02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
From outside the vehicle

From inside the vehicle (central locking
button)

If the locks repeatedly do not react when the
unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary
to replace the batteries in the remote, see
page 58. In this case the vehicle can be
unlocked with the detachable key blade. See
page 62.

the lock button on the respective doors.
The door must be closed first.

Alternative locking when parking
The central locking button on the driver's door
can also be used to lock the vehicle when you
leave it. To do so:

NOTE

The first press on the unlock button unlocks the
driver's door and a second press unlocks the
other doors and the tailgate (see also page 59).
This setting can be changed in the menu system. See page 191 for a description.

after the front

• Each door can be locked individually with

Before the vehicle can be locked from the outside with the remote key, the driver's door must
be closed. Any other door/tailgate that is open
will be locked and the alarm will be armed.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional keyless drive system, all doors/tailgate must be
closed before the vehicle can be locked.

• Press the lock button
doors have been closed.

The remote key locks and unlocks all of the
doors and the tailgate.

Be sure the remote key is outside of the
vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are
closed to help avoid locking the remote
inside the vehicle.

Locking

1. Open the door.
2. Press the lock section of the button.
Central locking button

The lock buttons on the door panel can be used
to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at
the same time. Press
to lock and
to
unlock.

Unlocking
The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the
vehicle in two ways:

• By pressing the unlock button
.
• The door can be unlocked by pulling the
door handle once and opened by pulling
the handle again.

3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle
completely and arm the alarm.

NOTE
Please be aware that locking the vehicle in
this way makes it possible to lock the
remote key in the passenger compartment.
To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the
outside by pressing the lock button on the
remote key.
If the vehicle is locked using the central
locking button, be sure that the remote key
is in your possession before closing the
door.

02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Automatic relocking
02

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will
rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened.

Automatic locking
When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and
tailgate can be locked automatically. This feature can be turned on or off by pressing MY
CAR and going to Car settings Lock
settings Automatic door locking. See
page 191 for a description of the menu system.

The glove compartment can only be locked
and unlocked using the detachable key blade
in the remote key. See page 61 for information
on removing the key blade from the remote
key.

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
key
–

Press the tailgate unlock button on the
remote key to unlock (but not open1) the
tailgate. See also page 59.
> The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the
alarm is not monitoring the entire vehicle. The accessory movement and inclination sensors will be automatically disconnected.

Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
Remove the key blade from the lock.

Locking/unlocking the tailgate

NOTE

•

If the doors are locked while the tailgate
is open, the tailgate will remain
unlocked until the vehicle is relocked by
pressing the Lock button on the remote
key.

•

On keyless drive vehicles, the gear
selector must be in the Park (P) position,
all doors and the tailgate must be
closed and the ignition must be
switched off before the vehicle can be
locked.

Glove compartment

Tailgate unlock button on the remote key

This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 276).

02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Unlocking the tailgate from the
passenger compartment

–

Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to
unlock (but not open1) the tailgate.

NOTE

Opening the tailgate manually
02

The tailgate is held closed by an electronic
locking mechanism. To open:
1. Press lightly on the rubberized plate under
the handle to release the lock.
2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate.

The taillights will illuminate automatically for
a short period when the tailgate has been
opened.

CAUTION

•

When pressing the rubberized plate,
only light pressure is necessary to
release the tailgate's electronic locking
mechanism.

•

When opening the tailgate, pull it up
using the handle. Too much pressure on
the rubberized plate can damage its
electrical connections.

Locking the tailgate with the remote key
Press the lock button (
also page 59

) on the remote. See

The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin
flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and
that the alarm has been armed.
1

This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 276).

02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
The alarm system
02

The alarm is automatically armed whenever the
vehicle is locked with the remote key or
optional Personal Car Communicator.
When armed, the alarm continuously monitors
a number of points on the vehicle. The following conditions will trigger the alarm:

•
•
•
•
•

NOTE
Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This
could affect the insurance policy on the
vehicle.

–

Press the Lock button on the remote key.
One long flash of the turn signals will confirm that the alarm is armed.

The hood is forced open.

Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in
MY CAR, under Car settings Lock
settings Keyless entry. See page 191 for
a description of the menu system.

The tailgate is forced open.

USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)

The alarm indicator light

A door is forced open.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The ignition slot is tampered with.
An attempt is made to start the vehicle with
a non-approved key (a key not coded to
the car's ignition).

• If there is movement in the passenger compartment (if the vehicle is equipped with
the accessory movement sensor).

Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)

• The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle
is equipped with the accessory inclination
sensor).

• The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).

• The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed.
A message will appear in the information display if a fault should occur in the alarm system.
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Arming the alarm

The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the red indicator light on the dashboard (see
illustration):

• Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed
• The indicator light flashes at one-second
intervals – the alarm is armed

• The indicator light flashes rapidly before
the remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot and the ignition is put in mode I—the
alarm has been triggered.

Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation
is subject to the following conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
Disarming the alarm

Remote key not functioning

Reduced alarm function

–

If the remote key is not functioning properly,
the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can
be started as follows:

Turning off the accessory alarm sensors

Press the Unlock button on the remote key.
> Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm
has been deactivated and that all doors
are unlocked.

Turning off (stopping) the alarm

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade
(see page 62 for information on detaching
the key blade).
> This will trigger the alarm.

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by
pressing the Unlock button on the remote key
or by inserting the remote key in the ignition
slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction
indicators confirm that the alarm has been
turned off.

The vehicle's menu system is used for turning
off these sensors (see page 191 for a description of the menu system).
1. Go into the menu under Car settings.
2. Select Reduced Guard (Press OK/
MENU to choose).

Other alarm-related functions

3. Two alternatives are now available:

• Activate once. If this alternative is

Automatic re-arming
If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will
re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened.

Audible/visual alarm signal

• An audible alarm signal is given by a battery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts
for 30 seconds.

• The visual alarm signal is given by flashing
all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes
or until the alarm is turned off.

In certain situations it may be desirable to turn
off the accessory inclination and movement
alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your
vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the
boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in
the vehicle with the doors locked.

2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot
(also on vehicles with the optional keyless
drive). This will turn off the alarm.
3. Start the engine (see page 116 for instructions).

selected, Reduced guard See
manual will appear in the instrument
panel display and the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will
be deactivated when the vehicle is
locked.

• Ask when exiting. If this alternative is
selected, a message will appear in the
center console display each time the
engine is turned off. Press OK/MENU to
accept and the accessory inclination
and movement alarm sensors will be
``

02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
deactivated when the vehicle is locked.
Press EXIT to cancel.
02

4. Press OK/MENU and lock the vehicle.
The next time the engine is started, the alarm
system will be reset and Full guard will appear
in the instrument panel display. The accessory
inclination and movement alarm sensors will be
reactivated.
In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to
deactivate the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors, do not make a choice in
the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

02 Locks and alarm

Instruments and controls........................................................................ 76
Ignition modes........................................................................................ 84
Seats....................................................................................................... 86
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 93
Lighting................................................................................................... 94
Wipers and washers.............................................................................. 102
Power windows..................................................................................... 105
Mirrors................................................................................................... 107
Compass*.............................................................................................. 109
Laminated panoramic roof*................................................................... 110
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*..................................................
Starting the engine................................................................................
Transmission.........................................................................................
Brakes...................................................................................................
Parking brake........................................................................................
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*..................................................................

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

113
116
121
124
127
130

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument overview

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Function

Page

Function

Page

Function

Page

Menus and messages, turn signals,
high/low beams,
trip computer

191, 99,
94, 205

105, 107,
52, 67

Lighting panel, controls for opening
fuel filler door/tailgate

94, 273,
68

Cruise control

138

In-door control panels (power windows, mirrors,
power child safety
locks, central locking button)

Power seat* adjustment controls

Horn, airbag

93, 22

Hazard warning
flashers

Main instrument
panel

77
Audio system controls

214

Audio system/Bluetooth hands-free
controls

214, 243
Climate system
controls

200

START/STOP
ENGINE button

Gear selector

121

Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)*

207

Ignition slot
Infotainment/menu
display

Wipers and washers

102, 103

–

Steering wheel
adjustment

Door handle

Hood opening control

325

Parking brake

127

Information displays

Information displays in the instrument panel

The information displays show information on
some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise
control, the trip computer and messages. The
information is shown with text and symbols.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
in the red area of the gauge. The engine
management system will automatically
prevent excessively high engines speeds.
This will be noticeable as a pronounced
unevenness in engine speed.

More detailed information can be found in the
descriptions of the functions that use the information displays.

Gauges
03

Indicator and warning symbols

should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function
check is carried out in ignition mode II, all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol
for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and
the symbol for low oil pressure.
Certain symbols may not have their functions
illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Indicator symbols

Symbol

Description
Fault in the Active Bending
Light (ABL)*system

Gauges in the instrument panel

Malfunction indicator light

Speedometer
Indicator and warning symbols

Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level
indicator in the gauge moves from right to
left as the amount of fuel in the tank
decreases. The arrow indicates the side of
the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on. See
also the section on refueling beginning on
page 271. See page 205 for more information on fuel level and consumption.

Function check

The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not drive continuously with the needle

All indicator and warning symbols light up in
ignition mode II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols

High beam and turn signal indicators
Indicator and warning symbols

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Rear fog light on

Information and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Stability system
Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS)A

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Symbol

Description
Low fuel level
Information symbol, see text
in information display
High beam indicator
Left turn signal indicator
Right turn signal indicator
The stability system's Sport
mode is activated.

Option in Canada

Fault in the Active Bending Light
(ABL) system
This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in
the ABL system. See page 97 for more information about this system.

Malfunction Indicator Light
As you drive, a computer called On-Board
Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's
engine, transmission, electrical and emission
systems.

The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE)
light will illuminate if the computer senses a
condition that potentially may need correcting.
When this happens, please have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light
may have many causes. Sometimes, you may
not notice a change in your car's behavior.
Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt
fuel economy, emission controls, and drivability. Extended driving without correcting the
cause could even damage other components
in your vehicle.
This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is
not closed tightly or if the engine was running
while the vehicle was refueled.
Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol for the Malfunction Indicator Light.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
warning light
If the warning light comes on, there may be a
malfunction in the ABS system (the standard
braking system will still function). Check the
system by:
1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off
the ignition.

3. If the warning light goes off, no further
action is required.
If the warning light remains on, the vehicle
should be driven to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for inspection, see
page 124 for additional information.
03

Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol.

Rear fog light
This symbol indicates that the rear fog light
(located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is
on.

Stability system
This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle,
see page 134 for more detailed information.

Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire
pressure in one or more tires is low, see
page 316 for detailed information.

Low fuel level
When this light comes on, the vehicle should
be refueled as soon as possible. See page
271 for information about fuel and refueling.

2. Restart the engine.
``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Information symbol

The information symbol lights up and a text
message is displayed to provide the driver with
necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. The message can be erased and
the symbol can be turned off by pressing the
OK button (see page 189 for information) or
this will take place automatically after a short
time (the length of time varies, depending on
the function affected).
The information symbol may also illuminate
together with other symbols.

High beam indicator
This symbol illuminates when the high beam
headlights are on, or if the high beam flash
function is used.

Left turn signal indicator
Right turn signal indicator

•
•

Sport mode
This symbol illuminates to indicate that the stability system's Sport mode has been activated
to help provide maximum tractive force, for
example when driving with snow chains, or
driving in deep snow or loose sand.

Warning symbols

Symbol

Description
Low oil pressure
Parking brake applied

Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates when the parking
brake is applied. This symbol flashes while the
brake is being applied and then glows steadily
when the parking brake has been set.
If the symbol continues to flash after the brake
has been set, this indicates that a fault has
been detected. See the message in the information display.

SRS airbags

Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol.

Seat belt reminder

See page 127 for more information about
using the parking brake.

Generator not charging

NOTE

Fault in the brake system

Both turn signal indicators will flash
when the hazard warning flashers are
used.

Warning symbol

If either of these indicators flash faster
than normal, the direction indicators are
not functioning properly.

If the oil level is normal and the light stays on
after restart, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Low oil pressure
If the light comes on while driving, stop the
vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and
check the engine oil level. Add oil if necessary.

Airbags – SRS
If this light comes on while the vehicle is being
driven, or remains on for longer than approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been
started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions
have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag,
and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s)
inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
See page 21 for more information about the
airbag system.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Seat belt reminder
This symbol comes on for approximately 6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or her
seat belt.

Generator not charging
This symbol comes on during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Contact
an authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine temperature
Engine overheating can result from low oil or
coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high
heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.
Engine overheating will be signaled with text
and a red warning triangle in the middle of the
instrument display. The exact text will depend
on the degree of overheating. It may range from
High engine temp Reduce speed to High
engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate,
other messages, such as Coolant level low,
Stop safely will also be displayed. If your
engine does overheat so that you must stop the
engine, always allow the engine to cool before
attempting to check oil and coolant levels.
See page 328 for more information.

Fault in brake system
If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may
be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 328. If the level in the reservoir is below

MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an
authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake
system checked.

WARNING

•

Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol.
If the
and
symbols come on at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off
the engine.

•

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a warning message
is displayed in the text window: DO
NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician and have the brake system
inspected.

If the ABS and Brake system lights are
on at the same time, there is a risk of
reduced vehicle stability.

2. Restart the engine.

• If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.

• If the symbols remain on, check the level in
the brake fluid reservoir, see page 328. If
the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven,
with great care, to an authorized Volvo
workshop to have the brake system
checked.

• If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the
vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake
system checked.

Warning symbol
The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a
problem related to safety and/or drivability. A
message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display. The symbol remains
visible until the fault has been rectified but the
text message can be cleared with the OK button, see page 189. The warning symbol can
also come on in conjunction with other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehicle further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using OK.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Reminder – doors not closed

Trip odometers

Clock

Trip odometers and reset button

Clock and setting control

If one of the doors, the hood or tailgate is not
closed properly, the information or warning
symbol comes on together with an explanatory
text message in the instrument panel. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the door, hood or tailgate.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed
lower than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the information symbol comes on.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed
higher than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on.

Road Sign Information (RSI)

Odometer display

Display

Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that
helps the driver see road signs with information
such as current speed. See page 136 for
detailed information.

Button for toggling between T1 and T2,
and for resetting the odometer

Control for setting the clock

The trip odometers are used to measure short
distances. The distance is shown in the display. A short press the button toggles between
the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A long press
(more than 2 seconds) resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise
to set the time. The set time is shown in the
information display.
The clock may be temporarily replaced by a
symbol in conjunction with a message, see
page 189.

Setting the clock in MY CAR
In addition to setting the clock manually as
described above, it can also be set in the MY
CAR menu system. See page 191 for additional information about these menus.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format (AM/
PM).

1. Go to Settings
Time.

System options

2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK to
activate this box.
3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and
press OK to confirm the setting and deactivate this box.
4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A) and
press OK to activate this box (B).
5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and
press OK to confirm the setting and deactivate this box.
6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to
complete the procedure.
Use the menu selection Settings System
options Time format to display the time in

03 Your driving environment
Ignition modes
Inserting and removing the remote key

Functions
The remote key has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that
can be used without starting the engine. The
following table shows examples of which functions are available in the respective modes.

Mode
0

The odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.
Power seats* can be adjusted
and the infotainment system can
be used for a limited time (to minimize battery drain see
page 214).

The laminated panoramic roof,
power windows,12-volt sockets
in the passenger compartment,
navigation system*, climate system blower, windshield wipers
can be used.

The headlights/taillights illuminate. Warning/indicator lights
illuminate for 5 seconds. Other
systems are activated. However,
the heated seats* and heated
rear window function can only be
activated when the engine is running. Mode II should only be
used for very short periods to
help avoid draining the battery.

NOTE
To access ignition modes I or II without starting the engine, the brake pedal must not be
depressed.

Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP
ENGINE button.

Inserting the remote key1
Holding the end of the remote key with the
base of the key blade, insert the remote key
into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration
and press it in as far as possible.

CAUTION
Foreign objects in the ignition slot can
impair function or cause damage.

Removing the remote key
The remote key can be removed from the ignition slot by pulling it out.
1

Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function

03 Your driving environment
Ignition modes
Ignition modes
Ignition mode 0
–

The vehicle is unlocked.

Emergency towing
See page 287 for important information about
the remote key when the vehicle is being
towed.

Ignition mode I
–

With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
ENGINE briefly.

Ignition mode II
–

With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.

Returning to mode 0
To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press
START/STOP ENGINE briefly.

Starting and stopping the engine
See page 116 for information on starting the
engine and switching it off.

Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
Front seats

•

WARNING

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.
Without releasing the catches, push the
backrest forward.
Move the seat as far forward as possible
so that the head restraint slides under the
glove compartment.

Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.

WARNING

Folding the front seat backrest

•

When transporting long objects, cover
sharp edges on the load to help prevent
injury to occupants. Secure the load to
help prevent shifting during sudden
stops.

•

When the seat's backrest is returned to
the upright position, push and pull it to
be sure that it is securely locked in this
position.

Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer
or softer lumbar support.
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and
move the seat to the position of your
choice.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the
angle of the backrest.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.

The front passenger seat backrest can be
folded to a horizontal position to make room for
a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:
Move the seat as far back and down as
possible.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
Power seat1

NOTE

Button for storing a position

•

Only one of the power seat's controls
can be used at the same time.

M (memory) button

•

The power seats have an overload protector that activates if a seat is blocked
by any object. If this occurs, switch off
the ignition (key in position 0) and wait
for a short period before operating the
seat again.

Power seat memory function

Three different seating and door mirror positions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.
The following example explains how button (1)
can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are
programmed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat and door mirror position in button (1):
1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the
desired positions using the seat and mirror
adjustment controls.

Power seat adjustment controls

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

2. Press and hold down the M (memory) button (4).

Seat forward/rearward and up/down
Backrest tilt

3. With the memory button depressed, press
button (1) briefly to store the current position for the seat/mirrors.

Operation
The seats can be adjusted for a short period
after unlocking the door with the remote control without the key in the ignition slot. Seat
adjustment is normally made when the ignition
is on and can always be made when the engine
is running.

Programming the seat's memory

Power seat memory buttons

Button for storing a position

To move the seat and mirrors to the position
that they were in when a button was programmed:
–

Press and hold down button (1) until the
seat and mirrors stop moving.

Button for storing a position

Optional on certain models

03 Your driving environment
Seats
NOTE
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop
automatically if the button is released before
the seat has reached the preset position.
03

Remote key memory and the power
driver's seat* and door mirrors2

2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to
Settings Car settings Car key
memory
3. To activate the remote key memory feature, press ENTER (check the box).
> The remote key is now ready to store the
position of the power driver's seat and
door mirrors.
Repeat this procedure for each of the vehicle's
remote keys.
See page 191 for a description of the menu
system.

Storing the positions of the power
driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key
1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the
desired position using the seat and mirror
adjustment controls.
Each remote key has a feature that enables it
to store (remember) the position of the power
driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehicle
is locked with that remote key.
This feature has to be activated for each of the
remote keys used in the vehicle as follows:
1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.

2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with the
remote key (or close the driver's door and
press the lock button on the door handle
with the remote key in your possession on
vehicles with the optional keyless drive).
> The positions of the power driver's seat
and door mirrors are now stored in the
remote key's memory.

This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE
The remote key's memory feature and the
power driver's seat memory function (the
settings made using the buttons on the side
of the seat, see the section "Power seat
memory function" on page 87) work independently of each other.

Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored
positions
To move the seat and door mirrors to the position stored in the remote key:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the same
remote key (the one used to lock the
doors). For models equipped with the
optional keyless drive, you must have the
same remote key in your possession.
2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.
The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position in which you left
them (if the vehicle has been unlocked with one
of the other keys and new seat/mirror adjustments have been made).

03 Your driving environment
Seats
NOTE

•

The seat will move to this position even
if someone else has moved it to a different position and locked the vehicle
with a different remote key.
This feature will work in the same way
with all of the remote keys that you use
with your vehicle.

Heated seats*
See page 201.

Rear seats
Rear center head restraint
03

Emergency stop

WARNING

•

Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on
the power seat control panel.

•

Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.

•

The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.

The center head restraint should be adjusted
according to the passenger's height. The
restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head.

• Pull the head restraint up as required.
• To lower, press and hold the button
(located at the center, between the backrest and the head restraint) while pressing
the head restrain down carefully.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint should
only be in its lowest position when this seat
is NOT occupied. When the center position
is occupied, the head restraint should be
correctly adjusted to the passenger’s
height. The upper edge of the head restraint
should be at least on a level with the uppermost point of the seat occupant's ear.

Manually folding down the rear seat's
outboard head restraints

NOTE

•

The head restraint must be returned to
the upright position manually.

•

The outboard head restraints cannot be
folded down on models that are not
equipped with this button.

CAUTION
The rear head restraints should not be kept
folded down for prolonged periods. This
could result in pressure marks in leather
upholstery.

WARNING
For safety reasons, no one should be
allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded down.
If these positions are occupied, the head
restraints should be in the upright (fixed)
position.

• Pull the handle closest to the head restraint
to fold it down.

• To return the head restraint to the upright
position, push it up until it clicks into place.

Automatically folding down the rear
seat’s outboard head restraints

1. The ignition must be in mode II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear head
restraints for improved visibility.

NOTE

•

The head restraint must be returned to
the upright position manually.

•

The outboard head restraints cannot be
folded down on models that are not
equipped with this button.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
CAUTION
The rear head restraints should not be kept
folded down for prolonged periods. This
could result in pressure marks in leather
upholstery.

CAUTION
To help avoid damage to the upholstery,
there should be no objects on the rear seat
and the seat belt should not be buckled
when the backrest is folded down.

Pull up the backrest release control on the
respective section(s) ( ) and fold the section(s) down. A red indicator ( ) shows
that the backrest is not locked in the
upright position.

NOTE

WARNING

It may be necessary to move the front seats
forward or put their backrests in a more
upright position before folding down the
rear seat backrests.

For safety reasons, no one should be
allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded down.
If these positions are occupied, the head
restraints should be in the upright (fixed)
position.

Folding down the rear seat backrests
The three sections of the rear seat backrest can
be folded down in different combinations to
make it easier to transport long objects.

• The left (driver's side) section can be folded
down separately.

• The center section can be folded down
separately.

• The right (passenger's side) section can
only be folded down together with the center section.

• All three sections can be folded down
together.

Release and lower the center head
restraint (see page 89) if the center and/or
right section of the backrest is to be lowered. The outboard head restraints fold
down automatically.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
WARNING

•

When one or more sections of the backrest is returned to the upright position,
check that it is properly locked in place
by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not be visible.

•

Return the outboard head restraints to
the upright position.

•

Long loads should always be securely
anchored to help avoid injury in the
event of a sudden stop.

•

Always turn the engine off and apply the
parking brake when loading/unloading
the vehicle.

•

Place the transmission in the Park (P)
position to help prevent inadvertent
movement of the gear selector.

•

On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time
can cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.

03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Adjusting

Horn

WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

With the optional speed-dependent power
steering the level of steering force can be
adjusted, see page 207.

G021138

Keypads

Adjusting the steering wheel

Horn

–

Lever for releasing/locking the steering
wheel

Press the steering wheel hub to sound the
horn.

Possible positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach:
1. Pull the lever toward you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to
push into place, press the steering wheel
lightly at the same time as you push the
lever.

Keypads in the steering wheel

Cruise control, see page 138. Adaptive
cruise control*, see page 140.
Infotainment controls, see page 216.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Lighting panel

High/low beam headlights

Overview, light switches with AUTO function
Overview, light switches

Thumb wheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Rear fog light

High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams

Headlights/parking lights

Instrument lighting

Position

Description

Illumination of the display and instrument lights
will vary, depending on ignition mode.

Daytime running lights/high
beams/high beam flash

The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the
thumb wheel.

Parking lights

The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumb wheel.

Headlight switch and lever

Low beams/high beams/high
beam flash

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Position

between high and low beams (this also
applies on models equipped with the
optional Active Bending Lights).
> The symbol
illuminates in the

Description
Low beams/high beams/high
beam flash
"Tunnel detection"* will activate the low beams in poor
lighting conditions

instrument panel to indicate that the
high beams are on.

The "Active high beam"* function can be used
High beam flash
Headlight switch with AUTO and lever

High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams

Position

Description
Daytime running lights/high
beams/high beam flash
Parking lights

Low beams/high beams/high
beam flash
Volvo recommends using the
position
whenever weather conditions allow the use of
the "Active high beam"* function (see
page 96).

Low beams
When the engine is started, the low beams are
activated automatically (daytime running lights)
if the headlight control is in position 0 or
.
Daytime running lights can be deactivated in
the MY CAR menu system under Settings
Car settings Light settings Daytime
running lights.
However, please be aware that these lights
may not be deactivated in Canada.

High beam flash

NOTE

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to
position 1. The high beams come on until the
lever is released.

•

The use of daytime running lights is
mandatory in Canada.

High/low beam headlights

•

Continuous high beams cannot be activated when the headlight switch is in
. High beam flash will
position
function in this position.

Continuous high beams
1. Set the ignition to mode II.
2. With the light switch in position 0 or
, pull the turn signal lever toward the
steering wheel to position 2 to toggle

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Active high beams – AHB*

AHB is a feature that uses a camera at the
upper edge of the windshield to detect the
headlights of oncoming vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this
happens, the headlights will automatically
switch from high beams to low beams. When
the camera no longer detects the headlights/
taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will
switch back to high beams after several seconds.

Activate/deactivate AHB by pulling the left
steering wheel lever rearward (toward the
steering wheel) as far as possible and releasing
it. If AHB is deactivated while the high beams
are on, the headlights will switch to low beams.

and the

symbol is displayed. The

symbol will go out when these messages are displayed.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in
heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active
again or if the sensors in the windshield are no
longer obscured, the messages will disappear

To activate this feature, turn the light switch to
position. Activation will occur if the
the
engine has been running for at least
20 seconds and the vehicle's speed is at least
12 mph (20 km/h).

and the
When AHB is activated, the
symbol
will illuminate in the instrument panel. The high
) in the instrument panel
beam indicator (
will also illuminate when the high beams are on.

NOTE

•

Keep the windshield in front of the camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

•

Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could
obstruct the camera.

Light switch in the AUTO position

If the
symbol illuminates in the instrument panel and AHB unavailable is displayed,
switching between high and low beams will
have to be done manually. The light switch can
remain in the AUTO position. The same applies
if Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

symbol will illuminate.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
CAUTION
In the following situations, it may be necessary to switch between high and low beams
manually:

•
•
•
•
•
•

In heavy fog or rain
In blowing snow or slush
In bright moonlight
In freezing rain
In areas with dim street lighting
When oncoming vehicles have dim front
lighting

•

If there are pedestrians on or near the
road

•

If there are reflective objects, such as
signs, near the road

•

When oncoming vehicles' lights are
obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.

•

When there are vehicles on connecting
roads

•
•

At the top of hills or in dips in the road

The optional rain sensor reacts to the change
in lighting conditions when, for example, the
vehicle is driven into a tunnel. If the daytime
running lights have been deactivated, tunnel
detection will activate the low beam headlights
while the vehicle is in the tunnel. The low
beams will be switched off approx.
20 seconds after the vehicle leaves the tunnel.
The rain sensor does not have to be activated
for tunnel detection to function.

When this function is activated, the headlight
beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve
according to movements of the steering wheel
(see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).
ABL is activated automatically1 when the
engine is started.

The function can be deactivated/reactivated in
the MY CAR menu system under My XC60
Active Bending Lights or under Settings
Car settings Light settings Active
Bending Lights.
See page 191 for a description of the menu
system.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

NOTE
This function is only active in twilight or dark
conditions, and only when the vehicle is in
motion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol
will illuminate and a message will be displayed
as shown in the table.

In sharp curves

See page164 for more information about the
camera's limitations.

Tunnel detection (standard on models
with a rain sensor)

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light
function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

The factory default setting is on.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Symbol

Display

Explanation

Headlamp
failure
Service
required

The system
is not functioning
properly and
should be
inspected/
repaired by
a trained
and qualified
Volvo service technician.

Auxiliary lights*
If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the
driver can use the MY CAR menu system to
choose to deactivate and turn these lights on
and off along with the high beam headlights2.

Parking lights

Rear fog light

Headlight control in position for parking lights

The parking lights (the license plate lights also
come on) can be turned on even when the ignition is switched off.
Turn the headlight control to the center position (the license plate lighting comes on at the
same time).
The lighting also comes on when the tailgate is
opened in order to alert anyone traveling
behind your vehicle.
In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear
parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate
is opened to alert anyone traveling behind your
vehicle. This happens regardless of the posi-

tion that the headlight control is in or which
mode the ignition is in.

The single rear fog light is located in the driver's
side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only
function in combination with the high/low
beam headlights.
–

Press the button to switch the rear fog light
on/off.
> The rear fog light indicator symbol
on the instrument panel and the
light in the button come on when the
rear fog light is switched on.

The auxiliary lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system, which should only be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See page 191 for more information about
the menu system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
NOTE
The rear fog light is considerably brighter
than the normal taillights and should be
used only when conditions such as fog, rain,
snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for
other vehicles to less than 500 ft.
(150 meters).

Hazard warning flashers

NOTE

•

Regulations regarding the use of the
hazard warning flasher may vary,
depending on where you live.

•

The hazard warning flashers will be activated automatically if an airbag
deploys.

Turn signals

When turning
Move the lever as far up or down as possible to start the turn signals. The turn signals will
be cancelled automatically by the movement of
the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned
to its initial position by hand.
03

NOTE

•

This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving
the lever in the opposite direction.

•

If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, check for a burned-out
turn signal bulb.

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

The hazard warning flasher should be used to
indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic
hazard.
–

To activate the flashers, press the button
in the center dash. Press the button again
to turn off the flashers.

Turn signals

When changing lanes
The driver can automatically flash the turn
signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever
up or down to the first position and releasing it.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Interior lighting, front

Glove compartment lighting

When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone
out and the engine is running, several LEDs
located near the roof console illuminate to provide faint lighting for the occupants of the front
seats. This lighting goes out just after the overhead courtesy lighting when the vehicle is
locked.

The glove compartment lighting switches on/
off automatically when the lid is opened/
closed.

Interior lighting, rear

The lighting comes on and remains on for
30 seconds if:

G021149

"Theater lighting"

• the vehicle is unlocked from the outside
with the key or remote control

Light switches, front roof lighting

• the engine is switched off and the ignition

Drivers side front reading light, on/off

is in mode 0.

Passenger's side front reading light, on/off

The lighting switches off when:

Overhead courtesy lighting.

• the engine is started
• the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting in the front part of the passenger
compartment is controlled with the buttons (1)
and (2) in the roof console.
Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger
compartment lighting:

• Off: right side depressed, automatic lighting off.

• Neutral position: automatic lighting is on.
• On – left side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.

100

Overhead courtesy lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and off automatically when button
(3) is in the neutral position.

The lighting comes on and remains on for two
minutes if one of the doors is open.
Rear reading lights

The lights are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*
The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch
on/off automatically when one of the front
doors is opened/closed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The passenger compartment lighting can be
switched on and off manually within 30 minutes
after the vehicle has been unlocked.
If the lighting is switched on manually and the
vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will
switch off automatically after one minute.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Cargo area lighting

Approach lighting

The cargo area lighting comes on automatically
when the tailgate is opened.

Approach lighting is activated by pressing the
approach light button on the remote key (see
the illustration on page 59).

Home safe lighting

When the function has been activated, the
parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror
lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and
door step lighting come on.

When you leave your vehicle at night, you can
make use of the home safe lighting function to
illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.
1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to put
the ignition in mode 0 (see page 85 for
information about the ignition modes).
2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible
towards the steering wheel and release it.

The time interval for this lighting can be set by
pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings
Light settings Approach light
duration. See page 191 for a description of
the menu system.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
The headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights,
and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain
on for 30 3, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval
can be set in MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Home safe light
duration. See page 191 for a description of
the menu system.

Factory setting

101

03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
Windshield wipers/washers

Windshield wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to switch
off the windshield wipers.

Single sweep
Move the lever upward from position
0 to sweep the windshield one stroke
at a time for as long as the lever is held up.

Intermittent wiping

Windshield wipers and washers

Rain sensor* on/off

With the lever in this position, you can
set the wiper interval by twisting the
thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed
or downward to decrease the speed.

Continuous wiping
The wipers operate at normal speed.

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency
The wipers operate at high speed.

CAUTION

•

102

Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.
Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen in place.

Windshield wiper service position
The windshield wipers must be in the service
position before the wiper blades can be
cleaned or replaced. See page 337 for additional information.

Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper
speed according to the amount of water on the
windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor
can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

(the wipers will sweep the windshield more frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the
windshield less frequently).

NOTE
The wipers will make an extra sweep each
time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol
will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle
must be running or in ignition mode II and the
windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or
in the single sweep position.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
. The windshield wipers will make one
sweep.
Press the lever up for the wipers to make an
extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active
mode when the stalk is released back to position 0.

Deactivating
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the butor press the lever down to another
ton
wiper position.

03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the key is removed from the ignition slot
or five minutes after the ignition has been
switched off.

CAUTION
The rain sensor should be deactivated when
washing the car in an automatic car wash,
etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the
wipers will start inadvertently in the car
wash and could be damaged.

Tailgate wiper/washer

Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*
High-pressure headlight washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlights are washed using two alternatives:

• Low/high beam headlights on. The headlights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights will only be washed once for every
five times the windshield is washed within
a 10-minute period.

Windshield washing

• Parking lights on. Optional Active Bending Lights will be washed once for every
five times the windshield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer.

Intermittent wiping
Normal (continuous) wiping

CAUTION

Washing function

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to
start the windshield and headlight washers.
After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps.

•

Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.

•

When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of
washer fluid remains in the reservoir,
the headlights will no longer be washed.
A text message will also be displayed to
remind the driver to fill the washer fluid
reservoir.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

103

03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
wiper will go into intermittent wiping function1.
This function is deactivated when a different
gear is selected.

NOTE
On vehicles with the optional rain sensor,
the tailgate wiper will be activated when
reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is activated and it is raining.

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer.

Intermittent wiping

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous)
wiping mode, selecting different gears will not
affect its function.

Normal (continuous) wiping

NOTE
The rear wiper is equipped with cut-off function, which means that it will not operate if
its electric motor overheats. The wiper will
function again after a cool-down period
(30 seconds or longer, depending on the
heat of the motor and ambient temperature
conditions).

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear
If the windshield wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate

104

Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

03 Your driving environment
Power windows
Power windows

panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors.

WARNING

•

Always remove the ignition key when
the vehicle is unattended to put the ignition in mode 0 (see page 85 for information about the ignition modes).

•

Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

•

Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are
operated.

For the power windows to function, the ignition
must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle
has been running, the power windows can be
operated for several minutes after the remote
key has been removed from the ignition slot, or
until a door has been opened.

NOTE

•

Movement of the windows will stop if
they are obstructed in any way.

•

To reduce buffeting wind noise if the
rear windows are opened, also open the
front windows slightly.

Operating
Driver's door control panel

Switch for power child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 52

Manual up/down

Rear window controls

–

Front window controls.

Move one of the controls up/down slightly.
> The power windows move up/down as
long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down
–
Operating the power windows

Manual up/down

Move one of the controls up/down as far
as possible and release it.
> The window will open or close completely.

Auto up/down.
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. The control

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

105

03 Your driving environment
Power windows
Resetting
If the battery has been disconnected, the auto
open function must be reset so that it will work
properly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to close the window and hold it for one
second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.

Laminated glass*
This glass is reinforced to help provide protection against break-ins and
improved sound insulation in the
passenger compartment.
The windshield, laminated panoramic roof and
other windows have laminated glass.

106

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
Power door mirrors

Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
same time.
2. Release them after approximately one second. The mirrors automatically stop in the
fully retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.

Door mirror controls

Storing the position*
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left door mirror
or the R button for the right door mirror.
The light in the button comes on.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
center.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be on.

WARNING
Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are.

The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the vehicle has been locked with the
remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with
the same remote control the mirrors and the
driver's seat adopt the stored positions when
the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Car key memory Personal settings in key
memory. See page 191 for a description of the
menu system.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking*
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help
give the driver a better view along the sides of
the vehicle, for example when parallel parking.

To activate this function, select reverse gear
and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt
the mirror down.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt
right mirror. See page 191 for a description
of the menu system.

The door mirror will reset to its normal position:

• after 10 seconds when reverse is disengaged and the car remains stopped.

• immediately when reverse is disengaged
and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

• immediately if you press the corresponding L or R button again.

•
• when the side mirrors are folded in.
when the engine is turned off.

NOTE
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.

Automatically tilting the door mirrors
when parking
The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to
help give the driver a better view along the
sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel
parking. When the transmission is no longer in

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

107

03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to
their original position.

This function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt
left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right
mirror. See page 191 for information about
the MY CAR menu system.

Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors comes on when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 101.

Interior rearview mirror
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters

Automatic retraction when locking

The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors
when locking. See page 191 for a description
of the menu system.

Resetting to neutral

• Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.

• Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

108

Auto-dim function
An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from
following traffic and automatically reduces
glare in the mirror.

When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the
remote key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.

Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be electrically reset
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work.

Settings Climate settings Automatic
rear defroster. See page 191 for a description
of the menu system.

Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice
from the rear window and the door mirrors.
Press the button once to start simultaneous
rear window and door mirror defrosting. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Switch the function off when then windows have cleared to help avoid battery drain.
The rear window is defogged/de-iced automatically if the vehicle is started in an outside
temperature lower than 48 °F (9 °C). Autodefrosting can be selected in MY CAR under

03 Your driving environment
Compass*
Operation

1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely
out of traffic and away from steel structures
and high-tension electrical wires.

Selecting a magnetic zone
1
2

2. Start the vehicle.

15
14

NOTE

Rearview mirror with compass.

The rearview mirror has an integrated display
that shows the compass direction in which the
vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are
shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE
(north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south),
SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest).
The compass is displayed automatically when
the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To
switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar
object and press in the button on the underside
of the mirror.

Calibration
The compass will need to be calibrated if the
vehicle is driven into a new magnetic zone (see
the magnetic zones on the map at the end of
this section). To do so:

3. Using a pen or similar object, press and
hold the button on the underside of mirror
until C is shown again in the mirror (after
approx. 6 seconds).
4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the display when calibration is complete.
Alternative calibration method:
Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disappears from the display when calibration is
complete.

4
12
8

9
6

11
10

G018632

For best results from calibration, switch off
all electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate system, windshield wipers, audio system, etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The correct zone must be selected for the compass to work correctly.
1. Put the ignition in mode II.
2. Using a pen or similar object, press and
hold the button on the rear side of mirror
for at least 3 seconds. The number for the
current area will be shown.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the number for the required geographic area
(1 – 15) is shown.
4. The display will revert to showing the compass direction after several seconds.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

109

03 Your driving environment
Laminated panoramic roof*
Introduction
The laminated panoramic roof is divided into
two sections.

• The rear glass section is fixed in place and
cannot be moved.
03

•

The front glass section can be slid horizontally to the open or closed positions or
its rear edge can be raised and lowered to
allow ventilation.

All references in this section to opening or closing the panoramic roof pertain to the front glass
section.
The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun
shade made of perforated fabric that is located
below the sections of glass. This shade can be
opened or closed, for example when driving in
bright sunlight.

Both the laminated panoramic roof and the sun
shade are operated by the controls in the ceiling console, near the rear-view mirror. The
vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II before
the laminated panoramic roof/sun shade can
be operated.

Operation

CAUTION

•

Remove ice and snow before opening
the laminated panoramic roof.

•

Do not operate the laminated panoramic roof if it is frozen closed.

•

Never place heavy objects on the laminated panoramic roof.

Auto open (arrow points toward the rear of
the vehicle)
Manual open
Manual close
Auto close

110

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Laminated panoramic roof*
WARNING

•

During manual closing, if the laminated
panoramic roof is obstructed, immediately open it again.

•

Never open or close the laminated panoramic roof if it is obstructed in any way.

•

Never allow a child to operate the laminated panoramic roof.

•
•

Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

•

When leaving the vehicle, ensure that
the ignition is in mode 0 (see page 84 for
information about the various ignition
modes) to disable the laminated panoramic roof. Never leave the remote key/
PCC* in the vehicle.
Never extend any object or body part
though the open laminated panoramic
roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is
completely switched off.

Automatic operation
1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the
control as far back as possible (to the auto
open position) and release it.
2. To fully open the laminated panoramic
roof, pull the control as far back as possible
a second time (to the auto open position)
and release it.

Quick open/close

NOTE

The laminated panoramic roof and the sun
shade can be opened/closed at the same time:

• Open - pull the control back (to the auto
open position) twice in quick succession
and release it.

• Close - push the control forward (to the
auto close position) twice in quick succession and release it.

For manual opening, the sun shade must
first be fully open before it will be possible
to open the laminated panoramic roof.
When closing, the laminated panoramic roof
must be fully closed before the sun shade
can be closed.

Tilt position

Manual operation
1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control
back to the first stop (the manual open
position) and hold it until the sun shade has
opened to the position of your choice.
2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated
panoramic roof: Pull the control back to
the first stop (the manual open position) a
second time to open the rear edge of the
laminated panoramic roof.
3. Opening the front glass section: Pull the
control back to the first stop (the manual
open position) a third time and hold it until
the laminated panoramic roof has opened
to the position of your choice.
Perform this procedure in reverse order to
close the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun
shade.

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass
section) by pressing the rear edge of the
control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and holding it until the laminated panoramic roof has closed completely.
If the sun shade is completely closed, it will
open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

111

03 Your driving environment
Laminated panoramic roof*
laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt
position.

Wind blocker
03

The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker
that folds up when the moonroof is open.

112

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
Introduction

•
•
•

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink information can be found on
the Internet at www.homelink.com or by phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

Programming HomeLink

WARNING
If you use HomeLink to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion.
When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage.
Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards. For more information,
contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF device
you are programming for use in other vehicles
as well as for future HomeLink programming. It
is also suggested that upon the sale of the
vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” on page 115.

NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition to be
switched on or be in the “accessories” position for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink. It is also recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal. The HomeLink buttons must be reset
first. When this has been completed, Homelink is in learning mode so that you can perform programming.

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator
light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.

HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

113

03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
or “smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace
this Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming” section. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or by
phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press
and hold the just-trained HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with “Programming” steps 4-6 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped
device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motorhead unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”

114

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.) There
are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold
for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence a second
time, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Programming” pro-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”
step 2 with the following:

• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release every two seconds (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to complete.

Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and hold the programmed HomeLink button until the trained
device begins to operate (this may take several
seconds). Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate
operator, security system, entry door lock,
home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience,
the hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time. In the event that there
are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or
by phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will
function for 30 minutes after the driver's
door has been opened.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
Button

NOTE

To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained, follow
these steps:

Resetting HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.

Use the following procedure to reset (erase
programming) from the three HomeLink buttons (individual buttons cannot be reset but
can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the following section):

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with “Programming”
- step 1.

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
at: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800–355–
3515.

2. Release both buttons.
> HomeLink is now in the training (or
learning) mode and can be programmed
at any time beginning with “Programming” - step 1.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
device.2

The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

115

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Start

WARNING

•

Never use more than one floor mat at a
time on the driver's floor. An extra mat
on the driver's floor can cause the
accelerator and/or brake pedal to
catch. Check that the movement of
these pedals is not impeded.
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be
firmly secured in the clips on the floor so
that they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driver's
side.

Ignition slot with remote key inserted ( see
page 84 for more information on ignition modes)

WARNING
Before starting the engine:

•
•
•

1
2

116

Fasten the seat belt.
Check that the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors are adjusted properly.
Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat
if necessary.

1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot
as far as possible, with the metallic key
blade pointing outward (not inserted into
the slot)1.
2. Depress the brake pedal2.
3. Press and release the START/STOP
ENGINE button. The autostart function will
operate the starter motor until the engine
starts or until its overheating function stops
it.

On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.
If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The starter motor operates for a maximum
of 10 seconds. If the engine has not
started, repeat the procedure.

CAUTION
If the engine does not start after the third try,
wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying to start it again to give the battery time
to recover its starting capacity.

NOTE
Keyless drive*
To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless
drive feature, one of the remote keys must
be in the passenger compartment. Follow
the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to start the
vehicle.

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
WARNING

•

Always remove the remote key from the
ignition slot when leaving the vehicle
and ensure that the ignition in mode 0
(see page 85 for information about the
ignition modes), especially if there are
children in the vehicle.

•

On vehicles with th optional keyless
drive, never remove the remote key
from the vehicle while it is being driven
or towed.

•

Always place the gear selector in Park
and apply the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle. Never leave the
vehicle unattended with the engine running.

•

Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but
very poisonous.

NOTE

•

After a cold start, idle speed may be
noticeably higher than normal for a
short period. This is done to help bring
components in the emission control
system to their normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which
enables them to control emissions and
help reduce the vehicle's impact on the
environment3.

CAUTION

•

When starting in cold weather, the automatic transmission may shift up at
slightly higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission
fluid reaches normal operating temperature.

•

Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach
some lubrication points fast enough to
prevent engine damage.

•

The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission
engage. Accelerating immediately after
selecting a gear will cause harsh
engagement and premature transmission wear.

•

Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will
help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.

If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

117

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Engine Remote Start (ERS)*

Using ERS

Introduction

1. The turn signals will flash several times.

ERS is a feature that makes it possible to
remotely start the engine to cool or heat the
passenger compartment before driving.
03

2. The engine will start.
3. The turn signals will illuminate for
3 seconds to indicate that the engine has
started.

The climate control system will start using the
same settings as when the engine was
switched off.
When the engine is started using ERS, it will run
for a maximum of 15 minutes before automatically switching off again. After 2 ERS starts,
the engine must be started in the normal way
before ERS can be used again.

After the engine has started, the vehicle
remains locked but the alarm is disarmed.

Remote key buttons used for remote engine start

Lock

NOTE
Always adhere to applicable State, Province
and or Local laws regarding engine idling
when using ERS.

WARNING
Keep the following in mind before using ERS

•
•
•

118

The vehicle should be in view.
The vehicle should be unoccupied.
The vehicle must not be parked indoors
or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes
are harmful to the health.

If the requirements for ERS have been met, the
following will occur:

Approach lighting
Information4.

Starting the engine
The maximum range for ERS is approximately
100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is
unobstructed. The vehicle must also be
locked.
To start the engine:
1. Press button 1 briefly.
2. Immediately press button 2 for approximately 2 seconds.

PCC keys only, see page 60

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Models with a Personal Car
Communicator (PCC) remote key* (see
page 60)
The indicator light for approach lighting will flash several times and then
glow continuously if all of the requirements for ERS have been met. However, this does not indicate that ERS has
started the engine.
To check if ERS has started the engine, press
the information button (3). If the engine has
started, the indicator light for button 2 will illuminate.

Active functions
When the engine is started with ERS, the following functions are activated:

• The climate control system
• The infotainment system.

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Deactivated functions

Switching off the engine

To jump start your vehicle:

When the engine is started with ERS, the following functions are deactivated:

With the engine running, press the START/
STOP ENGINE button.

1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to
mode 0, see page 84).

•
•
•
•

If the gear selector is not in the P position or if
the vehicle is moving, press the START/STOP
ENGINE button twice or press and hold it in
until the engine switches off.

2. First connect the red jumper cable to the
auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

Headlights
Parking lights
License plate lights
Windshield wipers

Switching off an engine started with ERS

Jump starting

Any of the following will switch off the engine if
it has been started with ERS:
key
Unlocking the vehicle
Opening a door

5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,
then start the engine in the vehicle with
dead battery.

Depressing the throttle or brake pedal
G021347

Moving the gear selector from the P position

• If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons
(10 liters) of fuel in the tank

•

More than 15 minutes have elapsed.

If the engine has been started with ERS and
switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for
3 seconds.

Message in the instrument panel display
If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be
displayed in the instrument panel.

4. Connect the black jumper cable to the auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and
to the ground point in your vehicle's engine
compartment (right engine mount at the
top, on the outer screw) (4).

• Pressing the lock button (1) on the remote
•
•
•
•

3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)
terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),
marked with a "+" sign, located under a
folding cover.

Connecting the jumper cables

6. After the engine has started, first remove
the negative (–) terminal jumper cable
(black). Then remove the positive (+) terminal jumper cable (red).

Follow these instructions to jump start your
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another
vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the
12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another
vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle.
``

119

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
WARNING

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

•

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.

Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

•

Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.

•

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.

•

Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.

•
•

Do not smoke near the battery.

CAUTION
Connect the jumper cables carefully to
avoid short circuits with other components
in the engine compartment.

120

Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to injury.

03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Automatic transmission

CAUTION
The transmission’s temperature is monitored to help prevent damage to the transmission or other drivetrain components. If
there is a risk of overheating, the warning
symbol on the instrument panel will illuminate and a text message will be displayed.
Follow the instructions provided there.

G021351

Park position (P)

Shiftgate positions1

Depress the button on the front of the gear
selector knob to move the gear selector
between the R, N, D, and P positions.
The gear selector can be moved freely between
the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)
positions while driving.

Select the P position when starting or parking.

Shiftlock
When P has been selected, the transmission is
mechanically blocked in this position. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II (see page 84)
before the gear lever can be moved from the
P position.

WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when the
vehicle is parked, particularly when parking
on a hill. The transmission's P mode may
not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if
it is parked on an incline.

Press the control to apply the parking brake,
see page 127.

CAUTION
The vehicle must be stationary when position P is selected.

Reverse (R)
The vehicle must be stationary when position
R is selected.

Neutral position (N)
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started with the gear selector in this position.
Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive (D)
D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts between the various forward

The information display (see page 77) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

121

03 Your driving environment
Transmission
gears, based on the level of acceleration and
speed. The car must be at a standstill when
shifting from position R to position D.

Geartronic–manual shifting
03

Geartronic allows you to manually shift among
your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic
can be selected at any time.

• To access the manual shifting position
from Drive (D), move the gear selector to
the right (to the area marked M in the illustration.

• To return to the D position from the manual
shifting position, move the gear selector to
the left.

While driving

• If you select the manual shifting position
while driving, the gear that was being used
in the Drive position will also initially be
selected in the manual shifting position.

• Move the gear selector forward (toward
"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward
(toward "–") to shift to a lower gear.

• If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the
transmission will downshift one gear at a
time and will utilize the braking power of
the engine. If the current speed is too high
for using a lower gear, the downshift will

122

Certain models only

not occur until the speed has decreased
enough to allow the lower gear to be used.

• If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-

NOTE

•

On vehicles equipped with Sport mode,
the transmission symbol in the main
instrument panel will change from D to
S when the gear selector is moved to
the manual shifting mode. If the gear
selector is moved toward "+" or "-", the
number of the gear currently being used
will be displayed, see page 77).

•

Please be aware that using Sport mode
may result in a slight decrease in fuel
economy. Driving in D can help improve
fuel economy.

mission will automatically shift down.

Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to
another gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition must be in position II, see page 84.

Geartronic–Sport mode (S)2
This transmission mode provides sportier shifting characteristics and enables a more active
driving style by making it possible to drive at
higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The
engine also responds faster when the throttle
pedal is pressed.
To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the
gear selector to the right. The transmission will
not switch to manual shifting mode until the
gear selector is moved forward or rearward
toward + or –.
Sport mode can be selected any time.

Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces
Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shifting mode can help provide better traction when
starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector to the right from the D position to the manual shifting position. The
text in the instrument panel display will
change from D to 1.
2. Press the gear selector forward and
release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the
selector forward again and release it to
select 3rd gear.

03 Your driving environment
Transmission
3. Release the brake pedal and press gently
on the accelerator pedal.

Shiftlock override

Move the gear selector from the P position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 61.

All Wheel Drive – AWD4

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example
because of a dead battery, the gear selector
must be moved from the P position before the
vehicle can be moved3.
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the
storage compartment behind the center
console to expose the small opening for
overriding the shiftlock system.
Insert the key blade into the opening. Press
the key blade down as far as possible and
keep it held down.

3
4

NOTE
The message AWD disabled Service
required will be appear in the information
display if an electrical fault should occur in
the AWD system. A warning light will also
illuminate in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, have the system checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent
All Wheel Drive, which means that power is
distributed automatically between the front
and rear wheels. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to
the front wheels. However, if there is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electronically controlled coupling distributes power to
the wheels that have the best traction.

If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 119.
Standard on certain models.

123

03 Your driving environment
Brakes

Brake system

Brake pad inspection

The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in one of these circuits, it is
still possible to stop the vehicle with the other
brake circuit.

On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition of the brake pads can be checked by raising the vehicle (see page 312 for information
about using the jack and removing a wheel)
and performing a visual inspection of the brake
pads.

If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure,
the stopping distance will be longer.
A warning light in the instrument panel will light
up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

•
•

The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.

•

Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface.

•

No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.

•

The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.

•

Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by
a jack.

WARNING

•

If this light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir.

If the vehicle has been driven immediately prior to a brake pad inspection, the
wheel hub, brake components, etc., will
be very hot. Allow time for these components to cool before carrying out the
inspection.

•

Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•

Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.

NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain
pressure on the pedal – do not pump the
brakes.

WARNING
Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.

WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a brake system message is
shown in the information display: DO NOT
DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician and
have the brake system inspected.

Brake lights
The brake lights come on automatically when
the brakes are applied.

Adaptive brake lights
The adaptive brake lights activate in the event
of sudden braking or if the ABS system is activated. This function causes an additional taillight on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to
help alert vehicles traveling behind.
The adaptive brake lights activate if:

124

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Brakes
• The ABS system activates for more than
approximately a half second

• In the event of sudden braking while the
vehicle is moving at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake
lights and additional taillights remain on for as
long as the brake pedal is depressed or until
braking force on the vehicle is reduced.

Power brakes function only when the
engine is running
The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure
which is only created when the engine is running. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the
engine switched off.
If the power brakes are not working, considerably higher pressure will be required on the
brake pedal to compensate for the lack of
power assistance. This can happen for example when towing your vehicle or if the engine is
switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The
brake pedal feels harder than usual.

brakes are needed, depress the pedal occasionally when driving through rain, slush, etc.
This will remove the water from the brakes.
Check that brake application feels normal. This
should also be done after washing or starting
in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system
The brakes will be subject to severe strain
when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or
when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
slower, which means that the cooling of the
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,
shift into a lower gear and let the engine help
with the braking. Do not forget that if you are
towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to
a greater than normal load.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

Water on brake discs and brake pads
affects braking

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to
improve vehicle control (stopping and steering)
during severe braking conditions by limiting
brake lockup. When the system "senses"
impending lockup, braking pressure is automatically modulated in order to help prevent
lockup that could lead to a skid.

Driving in rain and slush or passing through an
automatic car wash can cause water to collect
on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a
delay in braking effect when the pedal is
depressed. To avoid such a delay when the

The system performs a brief self-diagnostic
test when the engine has been started and
driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle
first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several
times and a sound may be audible from the
ABS control module, which is normal.

Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay
is minimized by cleaning the brake linings.

Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet
weather, prior to long-term parking, and after
the vehicle has been washed. Do this by braking gently for a short period while the vehicle is
moving.

Emergency Brake Assistance
EBA is designed to provide full brake effect
immediately in the event of sudden, hard braking. The system is activated by the speed with
which the brake pedal is depressed.
When the EBA system is activated, the brake
pedal will go down and pressure in the brake
system immediately increases to the maximum
level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal
in order to utilize the system completely. EBA
is automatically deactivated when the brake
pedal is released.

125

03 Your driving environment
Brakes
NOTE

•

126

When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure
in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. You must
maintain full pressure on the brake
pedal in order to utilize the system completely. There will be no braking effect if
the pedal is released. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal
is released.
When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink
more than usual when the engine is
started. This is normal and the pedal will
return to its usual position when it is
released.

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol

Specification
Steady glow – Check the brake
fluid level. If the level is low, fill
with brake fluid and check for
the cause of the brake fluid
loss.
Steady glow for two seconds
when the engine is started –
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.

WARNING
If
and
come on at the same time
and the brake level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake system-related
message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system
inspected.

03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Electric parking brake

Applying the electric parking brake

An electric parking brake has the same function as a manual parking brake.

NOTE

•

In an emergency the parking brake can
be applied when the vehicle is moving
by holding in the control. Braking will be
interrupted when the accelerator pedal
is depressed or the control is released.

•

An audible signal will sound during this
procedure if the vehicle is moving at
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE

•

A faint sound from the parking brake's
electric motor can be heard when the
parking brake is being applied. This
sound can also be heard during the
automatic function check of the parking
brake.
The brake pedal will move slightly when
the electric parking brake is applied or
released.

Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
brake cannot be applied or released. Connect
an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too
low, see page 119.

Parking on a hill

• If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
Parking brake control

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Push the control.
> The
symbol in the instrument
panel flashes while the parking brake is
being applied, and glows steadily when
the parking brake has been fully applied.

wheels so that they point away from the
curb.

• If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
The parking brake should also be applied.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.

127

03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Releasing the electric parking brake

NOTE

•

For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine
is running and the driver is wearing a seat
belt.

Symbols

Symbol

Read the message in the information display
A flashing symbol indicates that
the parking brake is being
applied. If the symbol flashes in
any other situation then this
means that a fault has arisen.
Read the message on the information display.

The electric parking brake will be
released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt.
Parking brake control

Manual release
1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and
press the START/STOP ENGINE button
(or press the START/STOP ENGINE button with a valid remote key in the passenger compartment on vehicles with the
optional keyless drive).
3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
4. Pull the parking brake control.

Automatic release
1. Start the engine.

128

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake will release when the vehicle
begins to move.

Specification

Messages

Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
vehicle to roll backward when the parking
brake is released automatically on a steep
incline. To help avoid this:
1. Keep the electric parking brake lever
pushed in with the left hand while shifting
into Drive with the right.
2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull
away, release the parking brake lever only
after the vehicle begins to move.

Park brake not fully released – A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released.
Try to apply the parking brake and release it
several times. If the problem persists, contact

03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off
with this error message showing, a warning
signal sounds.

Parking brake not applied – A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied.
Try to apply the parking brake and release it
several times. If the problem persists, contact
an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off
with this error message showing, a warning
signal sounds.

Parking brake Service required – A fault has
occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a
Volvo workshop if the fault remains.

WARNING
If the vehicle must be parked before the fault
has been corrected, always put the gear
selector in P and turn the wheels so that
they point away from the curb if the vehicle
is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is
pointing downhill.

129

03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
Introduction

Function

Normally, when the accelerator pedal is
released while driving down hills, the vehicle's
speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm
(the normal engine braking effect). However, if
the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if
the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases
despite the engine braking effect. In this situation, the brakes must be applied to reduce the
vehicle's speed.
HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and
makes it possible to increase or decrease the
vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using
only the accelerator pedal, without applying
the brakes. The brake system functions automatically to maintain a low and steady speed.
HDC is particularly useful when driving down
steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the
road may have slippery patches.

HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph
(7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator
pedal can be used to select any speed that is
possible in first or reverse gears. When the
accelerator pedal is released, speed is quickly
reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph
(7 km/h), depending on the gear selected,
regardless of the hill's gradient. It is not necessary to apply the brakes.

• The brake lights illuminate automatically
• HDC can be switched on and off with the
button in the center console. An indicator
light in the button illuminates when HDC is
activated.

• The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at
any time by applying the brakes.
HDC is deactivated when:

• The button on the center console is

• HDC only functions when first or reverse

• A gear higher than first gear is selected
• D is selected on vehicles with an automatic

in the instrument
panel illuminates and a message is displayed when the system is controlling the
vehicle's speed.

gears are selected (1 will be shown in the
instrument panel display when first gear is
selected).

NOTE
HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector
is the D position.

130

when HDC is controlling the vehicle's
speed.

• The indicator light

WARNING
HDC does not function in all situations, and
is a supplementary braking aid. The driver
has full responsibility for driving in a safe
manner.

Using HDC

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

pressed

transmission
HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is
done while driving down a steep hill, the system's braking effect will decrease gradually.

03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
NOTE
Engine response to pressure on the accelerator pedal may be slightly slower than
normal when HDC is activated.
03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

131

132

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

134
136
138
140
151
154
160
168
174
178
182

G000000

Stability system.....................................................................................
Road sign information (RSI) .................................................................
Cruise control........................................................................................
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................
Distance Alert* .....................................................................................
City Safety™ ........................................................................................
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*......
Driver Alert System* .............................................................................
Park assist*...........................................................................................
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ..........................................................
Blind Spot Information System*............................................................

DRIVER SUPPORT

04 Driver support
Stability system
Introduction

Spin control (SC)

The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control
system (DSTC) consists of a number of functions designed to help reduce wheel spin,
counteract skidding, and to generally help
improve directional stability.

The spin control function is designed to help
prevent the drive wheels from spinning while
the vehicle is accelerating.

CAUTION
A pulsating sound will be audible when the
system is actively operating and is normal.
04

Traction control (TC)
This function is designed to help reduce wheel
spin by transferring power from a drive wheel
that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the
opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

Engine Drag Control (EDC)
EDC helps keep the engine running if the
wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when
shifting down in the Geartronic manual shifting
mode or while using the engine's braking function on a slippery surface. If the engine were to
stop, power steering would not function, making the vehicle more difficult to steer.

Trailer Stability Assist – TSA*

TC is most active at low speeds.

Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle
that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and
trailer have begun to sway. See page 284 for
more information.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and
cannot be switched off.

This system is automatically deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)
This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking
one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows
a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

Operation
Sport mode
The stability system is always activated and
cannot be switched off.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and
cannot be switched off.

134

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

However, the driver can select Sport mode,
which offers more active driving characteristics. In this mode, the engine management system monitors movement of the accelerator
pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by
allowing more lateral movement of the rear
wheels before DSTC is activated.
Under certain circumstances, such as when
driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to
temporarily use Sport mode for maximum
tractive force.
If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help stabilize the vehicle.
To switch to Sport mode:
1. Press the My Car button in the center console control panel and select My XC60
DSTC in the menu.
2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu
by pressing EXIT.
> This puts DSTC in Sport mode.
Sport mode remains active until the driver
switches it off in the menu or until the engine is
switched off. DSTC will return to normal mode
when the engine is restarted.

04 Driver support
Stability system
Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel

Symbol

Message

Description

DSTC Temporarily OFF

The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC
reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required

The DSTC system is not functioning properly.

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.
• If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.

"Message"

Read the message in the information display

Steady glow for 2 secs.

The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol

DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Sport mode has been activated.

and

WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but
can never replace, the driver's judgment
and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always
be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

135

04 Driver support
Road sign information (RSI)
Introduction

Operation

Displaying the speed limit indication can be
deactivated. To do so:

• Deselect the alternative in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Road Sign
Information or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Speed alert
The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle
exceeds the posted speed limit by more than
3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the
symbol with the posted speed limit in the
instrument panel begins to flash.

To activate speed alert:
Examples of readable road signs

Registered speed information

Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that
helps the driver see road signs with the posted
speed limit.

When RSI registers a road sign showing the
speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol
on the instrument panel.

If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed
limit, this will be displayed in the center console.

Settings in MY CAR

Settings Car settings Speed alert
or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Limitations
RSI's camera has the same limitations as the
human eye. See page 164 for more information about the camera's limitations.

WARNING

Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit
(such as a sign with a town's name and the
permitted speed limit) will not be registered by
RSI.

RSI does not function in all situations and is
only intended to provide supplementary
information.
The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle safely.

Other factors that may interfere with RSI
include:
Possible settings in MY CAR

136

• Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR

• Faded signs
• Signs located in a curve

04 Driver support
Road sign information (RSI)
• Twisted or damaged signs
• Obstructed signs
• Signs that are partially covered by snow,
ice, etc.

137

04 Driver support
Cruise control
Operation

> The symbol
illuminates and the text
(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise control is in standby mode.

2. Press
or
for approximately a half
second and release the button to increase
or decrease vehicle speed by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

•

Putting cruise control in standby mode
does not set a cruising speed.

•

When cruise control is in standby mode,
the driver's seat belt must be fastened
before a cruising speed can be set.

NOTE

•

A temporary increase in speed by
pressing the accelerator pedal, for less
than 1 minute (e.g. when passing
another car), does not affect the current
cruise control setting. The vehicle will
automatically return to the previously
set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.

•

If one of the cruise control buttons is
kept depressed for more than approx.
1 minute cruise control is disengaged.
The engine must then be switched off in
order to reset cruise control.

Setting a speed
Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode
Resume set speed

NOTE

Deactivating
Activate/set speed
Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate
standby mode)

Engaging the cruise control function
Before a speed can be set, the cruise control
system must be engaged (put in standby
mode).
–

138

Press the

Use the
or
buttons set the vehicle's current speed. The set speed is shown in the display.

symbol (1).

Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

Automatic deactivation
Adjusting the set speed
After a speed has been set, it can be increased
or
buttons.
or decreased by using the
1. Press and hold down
or
until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
> This will become the set speed when the
button is released.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated
temporarily if one of the following occurs:

• If the speed drops below approximately
20 mph (30 km/h).

•
• If the gear selector is moved to position N.
When the brake pedal is depressed.

04 Driver support
Cruise control
• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.
• If the vehicle's speed is increased by using
the accelerator pedal for more than
1 minute.
The currently set speed will be saved in the
system's memory.

WARNING
Cruise control should not be used in heavy
traffic or when driving on wet or slippery
roads. Cruise control may not maintain set
speed on steep downgrades.

Temporary deactivation
The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise
control by pressing 0. The saved speed is
shown in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed
If cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The
vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set
speed.

WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the
button has been pressed.

Deactivation
Cruise control is disengaged by pressing
or
by switching off the engine. The set speed is
cleared.

139

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Introduction
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional
system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set time interval to the
vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use
on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as
on highways and other main roads.
When the driver has set the desired speed and
the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC
functions as follows:
04

WARNING

•

Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover
all driving situations and traffic, weather
and road conditions. The "Function"
section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of
before using this feature.

•

This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if
Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead.

• If there are no other vehicles in the lane
ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the
set speed.

• If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower
moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the system will adapt your vehicle's speed to help
maintain the set time interval to the vehicle
ahead. When there are no longer slower
moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will
accelerate to resume the set speed.

•

If ACC is switched off completely or in standby
mode and your vehicle comes too close to
another vehicle ahead, the driver will be
warned by the Distance Alert system (see
page 151).

140

The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.

Function

Function overview1

Warning light, braking by driver required
Controls in steering wheel
Radar sensor in front grille
Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:

• A cruise control system to maintain a set
speed

• A system to maintain a set distance to the
vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a
time interval. For example, you can choose
to remain approximately 2 seconds behind
the vehicle ahead. The actual distance
required to maintain a 2-second interval
will vary according the speed of the vehicles.

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING

WARNING

•

Adaptive Cruise Control does not react
to people or animals, or small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. It
also does not react to slow moving,
parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects.

The ACC system is designed to smoothly regulate speed. However, the driver must apply
the brakes in situations that require immediate
braking. This applies when there are great differences in speed between vehicles, or if the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.

Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as
city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there
is a great deal of water or slush on the
road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor
visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all,
see page 146.

•

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same
lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehicle's speed is regulated by accelerating and
braking. The brakes may emit a sound when
they are being modulated by the adaptive
cruise control system. This is normal.

WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is
always responsible for applying the
brakes if the system does not detect
another vehicle.

The brake pedal moves when the adaptive
cruise control system modulates the
brakes. Do not rest your foot under the
brake pedal.

WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active
mode at any permitted speed. However, if the
vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)
or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC
disengages (goes into standby mode) and will
no longer modulate the brakes2. The driver will
then have to maintain a safe distance to the
vehicle ahead.

When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby
mode or is switched off completely, the
brakes will not be modulated automatically.
The driver must assume full control over the
vehicle.

Warning light—driver braking required
Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force
that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the
vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations
requiring more brake force than ACC can provide and if the driver does not apply the brakes,
an audible signal from the Collision Warning
system will sound and warning light will illuminate (see page 161) in the windshield to alert
the driver to react.

NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.

Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Queue Assist. See page 144 for more information.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

141

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING

Operation

Before ACC can be used to regulate speed
and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must
first be put in standby mode.

Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see
page 146. In some cases there may be no
warning or the warning may be delayed. The
driver should always apply the brakes when
necessary.

To do so:
Press

ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level
roads. The system may have difficulty maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead
on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a
heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situations, the driver should always be prepared to
apply the brakes if necessary.

NOTE
Controls and display

Resume previous settings, increase speed
(each additional press increases speed by
1 mph (approximately 2 km/h).
Standby mode on/off
Set time interval
Put in active mode and set a speed
Set speed (parentheses indicate standby
mode)
Time interval while it is being set
Time interval after it has been set

142

The
symbol appears in the display and
parentheses (---) indicate that ACC is in
standby mode.

Steep inclines and/or heavy loads
04

Putting ACC in standby mode

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The driver's door must be closed and the
driver's seat belt must be fastened before
ACC can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's
door is opened, ACC will return to standby
mode.

Setting a speed
Once ACC has been put in standby mode, use
the
or
buttons to store (set) the vehicle's
current speed. This puts the system in active
mode. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is
shown in the display.

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
When the
symbol on the
left side of the display
changes to , the radar sensor has detected another
vehicle ahead. The distance
to a vehicle ahead is only
regulated when this symbol ( ) is illuminated.

Changing the set speed
After a speed has been set, it can be increased
or decreased by using the
or
buttons.
Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the
vehicle's speed changes by 5 mph
(approximately 8 km/h).
butWhen the system is in active mode, the
ton has the same function as , but results in
a smaller increase in speed.

Setting a time interval
The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be
and decreased by
increased by pressing
pressing . The current time interval is shown
briefly in the display following adjustment.
Different time intervals can be
selected and are shown in the
display as 1–5 horizontal bars.
The greater the number of
bars, the longer the time interval. One bar represents a time
interval of approximately
1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds.
At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle
ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval
slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time
interval to vary considerably in certain situations.

NOTE

•

If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control
buttons is pressed for more than
approximately one minute, ACC will be
deactivated. The engine must then be
switched off and restarted to reset ACC.
In some situations Adaptive Cruise
Control cannot be put in active mode.
Cruise control Unavailable is shown
in the display, see page 149.

The number of bars indicating the selected
time interval are shown while the setting is
being made and for several seconds afterward.
A smaller version of the symbol is then shown
to the right in the display. The same symbol is
also displayed when Distance Alert is in active
mode, see page 151 .

Standby mode (temporary deactivation)
Press
to temporarily deactivate cruise control (put it in standby mode). The set speed, for
example 55 mph, is then shown in parentheses.
The previously set speed and time interval are
resumed by pressing
.

WARNING

•

Only use a time interval that is suitable
in current traffic conditions.

•

A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic.

WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the
button has been pressed.

When ACC is in active mode, the vehicle’s
speed increases by approximately 1 mph
(1 km/h) each additional time
is pressed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

143

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Standby mode due to action by the driver
ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in
standby mode:

• if the brakes are applied
• if the gear selector is moved to N
• if the driver drives at a speed higher than

vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and
regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead.

left turn signal, ACC can assist by accelerating
briefly.

An automatic switch to standby mode may be
caused if:

This function is active at speeds above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

• engine speed (rpm) is too high/low
• the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph

the set speed for more than 1 minute.
In this happens, the driver will have to regulate
the vehicle's speed.
04

NOTE
If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for
a short time, such as when passing another
vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and
is reactivated when the pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode

(30 km/h)3

• the wheels lose traction
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is obstructed by, for
example, wet snow or rain.

Resuming the set speed
If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactivated
button on the steering
by pressing the
wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the
most recently set speed.

Adaptive cruise control is linked to other systems such as the stability and traction control
system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning
properly, adaptive cruise control is automatically deactivated and will go into standby
mode.
In the event of automatic deactivation, an audible signal will sound and the message Cruise
control Cancelled is shown in the display.
The driver must then intervene and adapt the

144

WARNING
Please be aware that this function will also
cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in
certain situations other than passing
another vehicle, for example using the left
turn signal to indicate a lane change or a
turn toward a highway exit at speeds above
approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

WARNING
The vehicle may accelerate quickly after
has been pressed if its current speed is
considerably lower than the set speed.

Queue Assist
Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is
linked to your vehicle's automatic transmission.
Queue Assist consists of the following functions:

• Enhanced speed interval (including when
the vehicle is at a complete stop or is moving at speed below 18 mph (30 km/h))

• Automatic standby mode when ACC
Passing another vehicle
If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by
ACC and the driver indicates that he/she would
like to pass the vehicle ahead by using the

Does not apply to vehicles equipped with the optional Queue Assist

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

changes target vehicles

• No automatic braking when at a standstill
• The parking brake is applied automatically

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Please note that the lowest speed that can be
set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can
maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle
ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist consists of the following features:

Enhanced speed interval

NOTE
The driver's door must be closed and the
driver's seat belt must be fastened before
ACC can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's
door is opened, ACC will return to standby
mode.

Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval
to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed,
including a complete stop.
In order to activate ACC at speeds below
18 mph (30 km/h):

• The vehicle ahead must be within a reasonable distance (not farther away than
approx. 100 ft/30 meters)

• The lowest speed that can be selected is
18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also
help maintain the set time interval to the
vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a
complete stop.

During short stops (less than approximately
3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle
will begin moving again automatically as soon
as the vehicle ahead begins to move.

Automatic standby mode when ACC
changes target vehicles

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle
ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automatically go into standby mode.
The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in
one of the following ways:

• By pressing
• By accelerating up to at least 3 mph

(4 km/h). ACC will then resume following
the vehicle ahead.
Your vehicle will then resume following the
vehicle ahead at the set time interval.

NOTE
ACC can remain active and keep your vehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. After
4 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake
will be engaged and ACC will go into
standby mode.
To reactivate ACC, the driver must release
the parking brake (see page 128).

If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be
a stationary vehicle ahead

The following only applies at speeds below
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h):
If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that
the radar sensor has detected) from a moving
vehicle to a stationary one, the system will
apply the brakes in your vehicle.

WARNING
At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC
will not react to a stationary vehicle and
apply the brakes but will instead accelerate
to the previously set speed. The driver must
actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle.

ACC disengages and goes into standby mode
if:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

145

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
• Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph
(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the
target object is a stationary vehicle or some
other type of object such as e.g., a speed
bump.

• Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph
(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so
that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to
follow.
04

No automatic braking when at a
standstill
In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply
the brakes and go into standby mode while the
vehicle is not moving. This means that the
driver will have to apply the brakes.

• The driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seat belt

• DSTC is put in Sport mode (see page 134)
• ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for
more than 2 minutes

• The engine has been switched off
• The brakes have overheated
Turning ACC off completely

• From standby mode, press once.
• From active mode, press twice.
The set speed and time interval are then
cleared from the system's memory and cannot
be resumed by pressing
.

This happens if:

•
•
•
•

The driver presses the brake pedal

The radar sensor and its limitations

The parking brake is activated

In addition to being used by ACC, the radar
sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see
page 151) and Collision Warning with Full
Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see
page 160). This sensor is designed to detect
cars or larger vehicles driving in the same
direction as your vehicle, in the same lane.

The gear selected is moved to P,N or R
The driver presses the
ACC in standby mode

button to put

The parking brake is applied
automatically
In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking
brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle
at a standstill.
This happens if:

146

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING
Accessories or other objects, such as extra
headlights, must not be installed in front of
the grille.
Modification of the radar sensor could make
its use illegal.

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
ahead is impeded:

• if the radar sensor is obstructed and cannot detect other vehicles, for example in
heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are
obscuring the radar sensor.

NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean.

• if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly different from your own speed.

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
In curves, the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target
vehicle.

Situations where ACC may not function
optimally

WARNING

•

The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may detect
a vehicle later than expected or not
detect other vehicles at all.

•

If ACC is not functioning properly,
cruise control will also be disabled.

WARNING

Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink)

In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, for
example a vehicle that suddenly enters the
lane between your vehicle and the target
vehicle.

•

Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the center of the lane
may remain undetected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

147

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING

•

Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is
always responsible for applying the
brakes if the system does not detect
another vehicle.

•

148

Fault tracing and actions
If the message Radar blocked See manual is
displayed, this means that the radar signals
from the sensor have been obstructed and that
a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.
This, in turn, means that the functions of the
ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning
System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian
Detection will not function.
The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause

Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way.

Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.

No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the
radar.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Cause

Action

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with
the radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect
the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that
it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol

Message

Description

Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.

Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.

Time interval while it is being set.

Time interval after it has been set.

Turn on DSTC to enable
Cruise

ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC is in Sport mode. Switch DSTC to
normal operating mode, see page 134 for more information.

ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC's Spin control is switched off. See
page 134 for more information.
-

Cruise control Cancelled

ACC has been automatically switched off.
The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

149

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Symbol
-

Message

Description

Cruise control Unavailable

ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:

• high brake temperature
• the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)
Radar blocked See manual

ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot
detect other vehicles.
See page 146 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Cruise control Service
required

ACC is not functioning.

Press Brake To hold + an
audible signal

The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep
the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal
will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.
–

150

Below 20 mph Only following

This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle
ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Distance Alert*
Introduction
Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information
about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Distance Alert is active at speeds above
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval
information is only given for a vehicle that is
driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direction. No information is provided for vehicles
driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a
standstill.

NOTE
Distance Alert only monitors distance to the
vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control
is in standby mode or off.

WARNING
Distance Alert only indicates the distance to
the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the
speed of your vehicle.

Depending on the optional equipment
selected, there may not be room for a Distance
Alert button in the center console. In this case,
the function is controlled through the menu
system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings
Car settings Distance alert On/Off.

Setting a time interval

Operation

Controls and display

Time interval: Increase/decrease
Time interval: On, while it is being set
Amber warning light1.

An amber warning light in the windshield glows
steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one
ahead than the set time interval.

Time interval: On, after it has been set
Press the button in the center instrument panel
to switch this function on or off. The indicator
light in the button illuminates when the function
is on.

to increase the interval or
Press
decrease it.

The illustration is schematic - certain details may vary from model to model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

151

04 Driver support
Distance Alert*
Five different time intervals
can be selected and are
shown in the display as 1–5
horizontal bars. The greater
the number of bars, the longer
the time interval. One bar represents approximately
1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is
approximately 2.5 seconds.
04

The number of bars indicating
the selected time interval are
shown while the setting is
being made and for several
seconds afterward. A smaller
version of the symbol is then
shown to the right in the display. The same symbol is displayed when
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated.

WARNING
Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.

Limitations
Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor
used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Collision Warning system. See page 146 for more
information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

NOTE

152

•

The higher your vehicle’s speed, the
greater the distance to the vehicle
ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a
given time interval.

•

The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 142.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•

Bad weather or winding roads may
affect the radar sensor’s capacity to
detect vehicles ahead.

•

The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a
motorcycle, may also make it difficult to
detect. This may result in the warning
light illuminating at a shorter distance
than the one that has been set, or that
the light will not come on at all.

04 Driver support
Distance Alert*
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol

Message

Description

Time interval while it is being set.

Time interval after it has been set.

Radar blocked See manual

Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and
cannot detect other vehicles. See page 146 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service
required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning
properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

153

04 Driver support
City Safety™
Introduction
City Safety™1 is a support system designed to
help the driver avoid low speed collisions when
driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic.
City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s
speed is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h).
This means that City Safety™ will not react if
your vehicle approaches another vehicle at
very low speed, for example, when parking.
04

The function is active at speeds up to approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists the driver
by applying the brakes automatically, thereby
avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a
collision.
City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late
as possible to help avoid unnecessary activation.

means that the system cannot help the driver
in all situations.
City Safety™ should not be used to alter the
way in which the driver operates the vehicle.
The driver should never rely solely on this system to safely stop the vehicle.
Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not
be aware of City Safety™ except when the
system intervenes when a low-speed collision
is imminent.

City Safety™ activates in situations where the
driver has not applied the brakes in time, which

154

•

City Safety™ is not activated when your
vehicle is backing up.

•

City Safety™ functions at speeds up to
30 mph (50 km/h). This system can help
prevent a collision if the difference in
speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph
(15 km/h). If the difference in speed is
greater, a collision cannot be avoided
but the speed at which the collision
occurs can be reduced. The driver must
apply the vehicle’s brakes for full braking effect.

•

City Safety™ will not intervene in a
potential collision situation if the vehicle
is being driven actively. The driver is
always responsible for maintaining a
safe distance to a vehicle or object
ahead.

If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional
Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and
Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems
interact. For more information about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake system, see
page 160.

City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a
low-speed collision is imminent. However, the
system will not intervene in situations where
the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies
the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoided. This is done in order to always give the
driver’s actions highest priority.

WARNING
City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle and does not react to small vehicles, bicycles or motorcycles or to people or animals.

City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

WARNING

•

City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to
the driver. It can never replace the
driver’s attention to traffic conditions or
his/her responsibility for operating the
vehicle in a safe manner.

•

City Safety™ does not function in all
driving situations or in all traffic, weather
or road conditions.

04 Driver support
City Safety™
Function

Location of the laser sensor in the windshield2

City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you
using a laser sensor mounted in the upper section of the windshield. If a collision is imminent,
City Safety™ will automatically apply the
brakes, which may feel like hard braking.
If the difference in speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead is more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ alone
cannot prevent a collision from taking place.
The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid
a collision or reduce its effect.
When the function activates and applies the
brakes, a message will appear in the informa-

tion display to indicate that the system is/has
been active.

NOTE

Press My Car in the center console control
panel and go to Settings Car settings
Driver support systems City Safety.
Select Off.

•

When City Safety™ applies the brakes,
the brake lights will illuminate.

If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will
reactivate when the engine is restarted.

•

In cases where City Safety™ has stopped the vehicle, the system will then
release the brakes. The driver must
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at
a standstill.

Using City Safety™
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is activated automatically each time the engine has been
switched off and restarted.

On and Off
In certain situations, it may be desirable to
switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving
in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.
may obscure the hood and windshield.

WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City
Safety™ has been switched off.

To switch City Safety™ on again:

• Follow the same procedure as for switching City Safety™ off but select On.

Limitations
The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed
to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles
ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and darkness.

When the engine is running, City Safety™ can
be switched off as follows:

The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

155

04 Driver support
City Safety™
WARNING
The laser sensor has certain limitations and
its function may be reduced (or it may not
function at all) in conditions such as heavy
rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick,
blowing dust or snow. Condensation, dirt,
ice or snow on the windshield may also
interfere with the sensor’s function.

Objects such as warning flags hanging from
long objects on the roof or accessories such as
auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front
of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may
also impede the sensor’s function.
Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increases on slippery road surfaces, which may
reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a collision. In situations like this, the DSTC system
(see page 134) will help provide the best possible braking capacity and stability.
City Safety™ emits a laser beam and measures
the way in which the light is reflected. Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective surfaces may not be detected. Normally, the
license plate and taillight reflectors give the
rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflective surfaces to be detected.

156

NOTE

Cause

Action

•

Keep the windshield in front of the laser
sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. See
page 155.

Clean the windshield or remove the
ice/snow.

•

Snow or ice on the hood deeper than
2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sensor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow.

The area of the
windshield in front of
the sensor is dirty or
covered by ice or
snow.

•

Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could
obstruct the laser sensor.

The laser sensor's
field of view is
obstructed.

Remove the
obstruction.

Troubleshooting
If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in
the information display, this indicates that the
City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in
some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of
you, which means that the system is not functioning.
However, this message will not be displayed in
all situations in which the sensor is obstructed.
For this reason, the driver must ensure that the
area of the windshield in front of the sensor is
always kept clean.
The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions.

04 Driver support
City Safety™
CAUTION

The laser sensor

If a crack, scratch or stone chip should
occur in the section of the windshield in
front the laser sensor, contact a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician to repair
or replace the windshield (see the illustration showing the location of the sensor on
page 155). Failing to do so may result in
reduced City Safety™ functionality.

•

Before the windshield is replaced, contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the
correct windshield is ordered and
installed. If the wrong type of windshield
is used, this may cause City Safety™ to
function improperly or not at all. Volvo
recommends the use of only Genuine
Volvo Replacement Windshields.
When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by
Volvo.

2.64 μJ

Maximum average output

45 mW

Pulse length

33 ns

Divergence (horizontal × vertical)

28° × 12°

NOTE

To help prevent reduced functionality,
please also observe the following:

•

Maximum pulse energy

The function of aftermarket laser detectors
may be affected by City Safety's laser sensor.

The upper decal describes the laser beam's
classification and contains the following text:
Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly
with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class
1M laser product.

WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City
Safety™ has been switched off.

The lower decal describes the laser beam's
physical data and contains the text:
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with
FDA performance standards for laser products
except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice
No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001
The laser beam's physical data is listed in the
following table:

157

04 Driver support
City Safety™
WARNING
Eye injury may occur if any of the following
points are not followed:

•

158

It is essential that all pertinent instructions be followed when handling laser
instruments. Testing, repairing, removing, adjusting and/or replacing any
components in the laser sensor may
only be done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

•

Do not remove the laser sensor (including removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to
laser class 3B according to standard
IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B
present a risk of injury to the eyes.

•

The laser sensor’s connector must be
disconnected before the sensor is
removed from the windshield.

•

The laser sensor must be mounted in
place on the windshield before connecting the sensor’s connector.

•

Do not view the laser sensor (which
emits spreading, invisible laser beams)
with optical instruments from a distance
of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

Symbols and messages in the display
When City Safety™ automatically applies the
brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main
instrument panel may illuminate and its associated message will be displayed.
A text message can be erased by pressing
briefly on the OK button on the turn signal
lever.

04 Driver support
City Safety™
Symbol

Message

Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City Safety

City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors
blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.

• Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).
For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 155.

City Safety Service required

City Safety™ is not functioning.

• If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

159

04 Driver support
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*
Introduction
Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and
Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the
driver if there is a risk of a collision with a
pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a standstill or one that is moving in the same direction
as your vehicle.
Collision Warning consists of the following
three functions:
04

The system should not be used in such a way
that the driver changes his/her way of operating the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the
system, the chances of an accident eventually
occurring increase considerably.
The Collision Warning and City Safety™ systems supplement each other. See page 154 for
detailed information about City Safety™.

WARNING

• Collision Warning warns the driver of a
potential collision situation.

• Brake Support helps the driver brake efficiently in a critical situation.

• Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-

No automatic system can be guaranteed to
function 100% correctly in all situations. For
that reason, never test the Auto-brake system by driving toward a person or object.
This could result in serious injury or death.

cally if a collision with a pedestrian or
another vehicle cannot be avoided and the
driver does not apply the brakes in time or
steer around the person/vehicle. Autobrake can help prevent a collision or
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs.
Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake
and Pedestrian Detection is activated in circumstances where the driver should have
begun braking much sooner, the system will
not be able to assist the driver in all situations.
This system is designed to activate as late as
possible to help avoid unnecessary intervention.

160

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•

Collision Warning does not work in all
driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. It does not react to vehicles not
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.

•

Collision Warning does not react to animals.

•

Warnings are only provided when the
risk of collision is high. The "Function"
section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of
before using Collision Warning.

•

Collision Warning will not provide a
warning or brake the vehicle for pedestrians at speeds above 50 mph
(80 km/h).

04 Driver support
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*
WARNING

•

Collision Warning will not provide a
warning or brake the vehicle for pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, even if
there is street lighting in the area.

•

The auto-brake function can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at
impact but the driver should always
apply the brakes for the best possible
braking effect, even if auto-brake is
actively applying the brakes.

•

Never wait for a collision warning. This
system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is in use.
Maintenance of the Collision Warning
system's components must only be
performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo technician.

Function

Brake Support
If the risk of collision continues to increase after
the collision warning has been given, Brake
Support is activated. Brake Support prepares
the brake system to react quickly, and the
brakes are applied slightly. This may be experienced as a light tug.
If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking
effect will be provided. Brake Support also
increases brake force if the system determines
that the driver has not applied adequate pressure on the brake pedal.

Auto-brake

Function overview

Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk
Radar sensor
Camera

Collision Warning
The radar sensor and the camera work
together to detect a pedestrian, stationary
vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the
same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk
of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian, the
driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light
and an audible warning signal. Collision warning is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h).

If a collision is imminent and the driver has not
applied the brakes or begun to steer around the
vehicle or pedestrian, the auto-brake function
is activated without the driver pressing the
brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help
reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision
occurs or limited brake force is applied if this
is sufficient to avoid the collision.

NOTE
The auto-brake and brake support functions
are always on and cannot be turned off.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

161

04 Driver support
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*
Operation
Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the
center console control panel and using the
menus displayed.

console control panel and going to Settings
Car settings Driver support systems
Warning sound if risk of collision.

NOTE

•

When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,
the warning light and signal will be used
by that function, even if the warnings
provided by Collision Warning have
been deactivated by the driver.

•

In situations where traffic is moving at
considerably different speeds, or if the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warnings may be considered to be late, even
if the setting Long has been selected.

Setting a warning distance
Activating/deactivating both warning
signals

To switch Collision Warning's audible and visual signals on or off at the same time, press
MY CAR on the center console control panel
and go to Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning. If
Collision Warning is on, the system will perform
a self-test each time the engine is started by
briefly illuminating the warning light. See page
191 for a description of the menu system.
When the engine is switched on, the Collision
Warning setting that was being used when it
was switched off will be the default setting.

NOTE
The auto-brake and pedestrian detection
features are always on, even if the audible
and visual warning signals have been deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the audible
warning signal only

This setting determines the distance at which
the visual and audible warnings are triggered.
Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY
CAR on the center console control panel and
going to Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning
Warning distance.
The warning distance determines the level of
sensitivity used by the system. The warning
distance Long provides an earlier warning.
Begin by using Long and if the system gives
too many warnings, try changing to Normal.

The current Collision Warning settings can be
checked by pressing MY CAR on the center
console control panel and going to Settings
Car settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning.

WARNING

•

The setting Short should only be used
in situations where traffic is light and
moving at low speeds.

•

Collision Warning alerts the driver to the
risk of a collision but this function cannot reduce the driver’s reaction time.

•

For Collision Warning to be as effective
as possible, it is recommended that Distance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see
page 151.

The audible warning signal can be activated/
deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center

162

Checking settings

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Limitations
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the visual
warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
For this reason, always activate the audible
warning signal.
Slippery driving conditions increase braking
distance, which can reduce the system's

04 Driver support
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*
capacity to avoid a collision. In these conditions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide the
best possible braking effect while helping to
maintain stability.

WARNING

•

Warnings may not be provided if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is short,
or if movements of the steering wheel/
brake pedal are great, such as during
active driving.

NOTE
The visual warning signal may be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature due to strong
sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible
warning signal will be used, even if it has
been deactivated in the menu system.

NOTE

In certain situations, the system cannot
provide warnings or warnings may be
delayed if traffic conditions or other
external factors make it impossible for
the radar sensor or camera to detect a
pedestrian or a vehicle ahead.

•

The sensor system has a limited range
for pedestrians and provides warnings
and braking effect most effectively at
speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, the
system functions best if your vehicle’s
speed is below approximately 45 mph
(70 km/h).
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles may not be provided in dark
conditions or in poor visibility.

The Collision Warning system uses the same
radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 146.

If warnings are given too frequently, the
warning distance can be reduced (see
page 162). This causes the system to provide later warnings, which decreases the
total number of warnings provided.

WARNING

•

The system is not activated at speeds
under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). Therefore, it will not brake your vehicle if you
approach a vehicle ahead at very low
speed, such as when parking.

•

The driver's actions always have highest priority and override the Collision
Warning system. This means that the
system will not intervene in situations
where the driver is actively steering,
braking or pressing the accelerator
pedal, even if a collision is imminent.

•

When Auto-brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object, your vehicle will remain at a standstill for approx.
1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been
braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your
vehicle's speed will be reduced to the
same speed as that vehicle's.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

163

04 Driver support
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*
The camera’s limitations
The camera is used by Collision Warning with
Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see
page 168), and Lane Departure Warning (see
page 171).

WARNING

•

The camera has the same limitations as
the human eye. In other words, its
“vision is impaired” by adverse weather
conditions such as heavy snowfall,
dense fog, etc. These conditions may
reduce the function of systems that
depend on the camera or cause these
systems to temporarily stop functioning.

•

Never place any objects, decals, etc.,
on the windshield in front of the camera.
This could reduce or block the camera’s
function, and could cause one or more
of the systems that utilize the camera to
stop functioning.

NOTE

•
04

•

To help protect the camera in very hot
conditions, it may be temporarily
switched off for approximately 15
minutes after the engine has been
started.
Keep the section of the windshield in
front of the camera clean and free of ice,
snow, or condensation.

•

Strong sunlight, reflections from the
road surface, ice or snow covering the
road, a dirty road surface, or unclear
lane marker lines may drastically reduce
the camera’s capacity to detect the side
of a lane, a pedestrian or another vehicle.

Pedestrians

The system cannot identify all pedestrians

The Collision Warning system can only identify
and detect a pedestrian who is standing
upright. This person can be standing still, walking or running.
This means that the system has to be able to
identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs,
the upper and lower parts of the body and a
person's pattern of movement when walking or
running.
If parts of the body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the pedestrian.
The following conditions apply:

• In order to detect a pedestrian, the system
must have a full view of the person's entire

164

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*
body and the person must be at least
32 in. (80 cm) tall.

• The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying a large object.

• The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian
at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for
the human eye.

• The camera's function is deactivated and
will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or
in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in
the area.

WARNING

•

Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake
and Pedestrian Detection is designed to
be a supplementary driving aid. It is not,
however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for operating the
vehicle in a safe manner.

•

The system cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations, such as in darkness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who are
less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or
people wearing clothing that obscures
the contours of their bodies.

Fault tracing and actions
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is displayed, this means that the camera is obscured and cannot detect pedestrians,
vehicles or road marker lines in front of the
vehicle.
This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with
Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection,
Lane Departure Warning, and Driver Alert Control will not have full functionality.
The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

165

04 Driver support
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Cause

Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered
with ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera.

No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the
camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the
display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register
visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty.

Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this
surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol

166

Message

Description

Collision Warning Off

Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning Unavailable

Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate
the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was activated

Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Windscreen Sensors
blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by
snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see
page 164 for more information on the camera’s limitations.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*
Symbol

Message

Description

Radar blocked See manual

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for
example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other
vehicles, see page 146 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service
required

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning.
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

167

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Introduction
The Driver Alert System is designed to help a
driver who may be becoming fatigued or who
is inadvertently leaving the lane.

Driver Alert Control (DAC)–
introduction

The Driver Alert System consists of two different functions that can be switched on together
or separately.

WARNING

• Driver Alert Control (DAC)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see
04

page 171
When one or both of the functions has been
switched on, it is in standby mode and is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of
40 mph (65 km/h).
The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed
goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).
Both functions use a camera that is dependent
on the road/lane being clearly marked by painted lines on each side.

This function is intended to alert the driver if
his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the
driver is distracted or fatigued.

168

•

DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks at
regular intervals to help remain alert.

•

In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver’s behavior. In situations of
this type, no warning will be provided.
Therefore, it is important to take breaks
at regular intervals, regardless of
whether or not DAC has given a warning.

Limitations

NOTE
The camera has certain limitations, see
page 146.

WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not function in
all situations and is designed to be a supplementary aid. It is not, however, intended
to replace the driver’s attention and judgement.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowly changing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be
used on main roads and is not meant for use in
city traffic.

A camera monitors the painted lines marking
the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and
compares the direction of the road with the
driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The
driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow
the lane smoothly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not
become erratic.

• if the driver is testing the LDW function
• in strong crosswinds
• on grooved road surfaces.

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Operating DAC
Certain settings can be made from the menu
system controlled from the center instrument
panel.
The current system status can be checked on
the trip computer’s display by using the buttons on the left steering wheel lever.

Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver
Alert is displayed. The second line shows
the alternatives Off Driver Alert Standby
<40 mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/
h), Unavailable or the level ( number of
bars) will be displayed.

If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the
driver will be alerted by an audible signal and
the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is
displayed. The warning will be repeated after a
short time if the driving pattern remains the
same.

OK button. Confirms and erases a message in the display.

Activating DAC
Press MY CAR in the center instrument panel
and go to Car settings Driver Alert and
select On. See page 191 for more information
on the menu system.

WARNING

•

An alert should be taken seriously since
it is sometimes difficult for a driver to
realize that he/she is fatigued.

•

In the event of a warning or if the driver
feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible
in a safe place and rest.

The function is activated when the
vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph
(65 km/h). The display will show level
markings of 1–5 bars, where a low
number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high
number of bars indicates stable driving.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

169

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol

170

Message

Description

Driver Alert OFF

The function is not switched on.

Driver Alert Standby <40
mph (Driver Alert Standby
<65 km/h)

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).

Driver Alert Unavailable

The road lacks clear marker lines.

Driver Alert

The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low
number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a
break

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Windscreen Sensors
blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area
of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 164 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service
required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message
remains in the display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)–
introduction

Operation and function

and Driver Alert Standby <40 mph will be
displayed.
If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s
side marker lines, Lane Depart Warn
Unavailable will be displayed.
If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s
left or right side marker lines, the driver will be
alerted by an audible signal.
No warning signal will be given in the following situations:

This function is designed to help reduce the
risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle
leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off
the road or into the opposite lane. LDW consists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side
marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible
signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line
or the road’s center dividing line.

LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the
button on the center console. A light in the button illuminates when the function is on.
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart
Warn Standby <40 mph (Lane Depart Warn
Standby <65 km/h) when the function is in
standby mode.
When LDW is in standby mode, the function is
activated automatically after the camera has
monitored the road’s side marker lines and the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h).
Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be displayed.

•
•
•
•
•

The turn signal is being used
The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1
The throttle pedal is pressed quickly1
If the steering wheel is moved quickly1
In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s
body to sway

See page 164 for information on the camera’s
limitations.

WARNING
The driver will only be warned once for each
time the wheels cross a marker line. No
alarm will be given if a marker line is
between the wheels.

If the vehicle’s speed falls below 37 mph
(60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode
1

When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

171

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Settings
Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be
made in the menu system by pressing My
Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Lane Departure
Warning.
There are two alternatives:

On at start-up: This selection switches LDW
on each time the engine is started. Otherwise,

the system will be in the mode that it was in
when the engine was switched off.

Increased sensitivity: This selection increases the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be
given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations
apply. When this setting is being used, the system only needs to monitor lane marker lines on
one side of the vehicle to change status to
Lane Depart Warn Available.

Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol

172

Message

Description

Lane departure warning ON/Lane
departure warning OFF

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Available

The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

Lane Depart Warn Standby <40
mph (Lane Depart Warn Standby
<65 km/h)

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph
(65 km/h).

Lane Depart Warn Unavailable

The road lacks clear marker lines.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Symbol

Message

Description

Windscreen Sensors blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean
the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 164 for information on the camera’s
limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the
message remains in the display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

173

04 Driver support
Park assist*
Introduction

Function

–

NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated
with the vehicle's electrical system will be
included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle.

WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT a
safety system. This system is designed to
be a supplementary aid when parking the
vehicle. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judgement.

Park assist button

The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button in the center console illuminates when the
system is on.

• The front park assist system is active from
the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately
10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the
vehicle is backing up.

• Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.

174

Activating/deactivating
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started.

The park assist system is designed to assist
you when driving into parking spaces, garages,
etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front
bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the distance to a vehicle or an object that may be
close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An
audible signal and symbols in the audio system’s display indicate the distance to the
object.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Press the Park assist button on the center
console to temporarily deactivate the system(s).
> The indicator light in the button will go
out when the system has been deactivated.

Park assist will be automatically reactivated the
next time the engine is started, or if the button
is pressed (the indicator light in the button will
illuminate).

NOTE
Park assist is disengaged automatically
when the parking brake is applied.

04 Driver support
Park assist*
Signals from the park assist system

Audible signal

Rear park assist

The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to an
object, and becomes constant when you are
within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object
in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are
objects within this distance both behind and in
front of the vehicle, the tone alternates
between front and rear speakers.

NOTE
View in the display (warning for objects front left/
right rear)

Visual indicator
The audio system’s display gives an overview
of the vehicle’s position in relation to a
detected object.
The marked sectors in the display indicate that
one or more of the sensors has detected an
object. The closer the car symbol comes to a
sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object.
If the infotainment system is switched off, the
park assist system will not be able to provide a
visual indicator. An audible signal will still be
provided.

The level of the audible signal can be lowered/raised with the infotainment volume
control. The level can also be set in the MY
CAR menu system. See page 191 for a
description of the menu system.

If the volume of another source from the audio
system is high, this will be automatically lowered.

The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal
comes from the rear speakers.
The system must be deactivated when towing
a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
assist system's sensors.

NOTE
Rear park assist is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine
trailer wiring is used.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

175

04 Driver support
Park assist*
Front park assist

Faults in the system

Cleaning the sensors

If the information symbol illuminates and Park
assist syst Service required is shown on the
information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and has been
disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle
is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the audio system's front
speakers.

G031402

CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include
such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
not indicate a fault in the system.

Location of the front sensors

It may not be possible to combine auxiliary
headlights and front park assist since these
lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE
Front park assist is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied and or when the
gear selector is in the P position.
Location of the rear sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them

176

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Park assist*
with water and a suitable car washing detergent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause
incorrect warning signals.

NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system.
04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

177

04 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Introduction

Function

PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen
image to indicate the direction that the vehicle
will take as it moves rearward, which helps
simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight
space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle.
04

WARNING

178

If the image on the screen seems too dark,
brightness can be increased with the thumb
wheel on the lighting panel.

NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated
with the vehicle's electrical system will be
included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle.

•

PAC is designed to be a supplementary
aid when parking the vehicle. It is not,
however, intended to replace the
driver’s attention and judgment.

•

The camera has blind spots where it
cannot detect objects or people behind
the vehicle.

•

Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle.

Ambient lighting conditions
The camera automatically monitors the ambient lighting conditions behind the vehicle and
constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may
cause the brightness and quality of the image
on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light
is increased in dark conditions or in bad
weather, which may affect image quality.

The Park Assist Camera uses the display in the
center console to show the area behind the car
while you are backing up.

NOTE
The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and
if a person or animal should suddenly appear
from the side.
PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the opening handle.
The camera has built-in electronics that help
reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image
shown on the screen is as natural as possible.
This may cause some objects on the screen to
“lean,” which is normal.

WARNING
Objects seen on the screen may be closer
than they appear to be.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

In order to function properly, the camera
lens should always be kept clean. This is
particularly important in bad weather. Keep
the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.

04 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Using PAC
Activation

With the camera zoomed in on the trailer hitch,
a guiding line showing the hitch's path toward
the trailer will be projected. This feature can be
activated in the MY CAR menu. See page
191 for a description of the menu system. The
guiding lines for the wheels (see the following
section "Guiding lines") and for the trailer hitch
cannot be displayed at the same time.

Guiding lines

If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed)
image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press
EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view.

Deactivation

PAC is activated when the gear selector is
moved to R if the system is selected in the MY
CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM
button in the center console. See page 191 for
a description of the menu system.
If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use,
PAC will automatically override the navigation
system to show the camera's image on the
screen instead of navigation information, for as
long as reverse gear is selected.

Zoom
The camera can be useful when attaching a
trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer
hitch (and press this button again to return to
the normal camera view).

Move the gear selector from R to another position. There is a slight delay in the PAC system,
which means that the view from behind the
vehicle will remain on the screen for approximately 15 seconds after the gear selector has
been moved from the R position or until the
vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the
mode that it was in before R was selected and
will, for example, display navigation system
information.

The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were a path on the ground behind the vehicle
and are affected by the way in which the steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver to
see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she
turns the steering wheel while backing up.

NOTE
When backing up with a trailer, the guiding
lines show the path that the vehicle will
take, not the trailer.

NOTE
If any button on the center console control
panel is pressed, the camera image will disappear from the display. Pressing CAM will
return the camera image to the display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

179

04 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
WARNING
Keep in mind that the image on the screen
only shows the area behind the vehicle. The
driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of
the vehicle when turning while backing up.

Marker lines

The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of
approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the
bumper. These lines also indicate the outmost
limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of
the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle,
even when it turns.

The markers change color (from yellow to
orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to
the object.

The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side marker
lines show where the wheels will roll and can
extend up to approximately 10.5 ft (3.2 m)
behind the bumper if there are no objects in the
way.

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist

Marker (color)

Distance to
object

Yellow

more than 5 ft (1.5 m)

Orange

5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m)

Red

0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Settings
Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view
is displayed and make the desired settings.

Parking camera settings

• Mark Guide lines to display the sidelines
while backing up.

• Mark Distance bars to display the intersecting lines while backing up.

The PAC system's lines

Activating the system
• Mark Automatic activation of rear
camera to activate PAC each time reverse

Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter)
zone behind the vehicle
Marker line for the clear back-up zone

gear is selected.
Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate distance

"Wheel tracks"
The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft
(30 centimeters) of the rear bumper.

180

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park
Assist system, the distance to an object will be
indicated more exactly and colored markers in
the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has
detected the object.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•

Mark Off to turn off PAC completely.

Summary

• The camera is activated when the gear
selector is moved to R (this can be
changed in the MY CAR menu) and the

04 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
image is shown on the center console display.

• When backing up, two solid lines are projected on the screen to show the path that
the vehicle's rear wheels will take. These
lines are affected by movements of the
steering wheel. The vehicle's approximate
outer dimension are shown by two dashed
lines.

• The graphic lines will not be displayed
when backing up with a trailer that is connected to the vehicle's electrical system.

• Objects on the ground that are closer than
1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be detected by
the camera.

• The camera is active for approx.
5 seconds after the gear selector is moved
to R or until the vehicle's speed exceeds
6 mph (10 km/h).

• The optional Park Assist sensors and the
parking camera work together and information from the sensors is shown graphically on the display.

• The graphic lines shown on the screen
when the vehicle backs up can be disabled
in the settings menu.

• Manual zoom can be selected in the MY
CAR menu.

• The system can be switched off by press-

R. This setting can be changed in the MY
CAR menu.

• If there are two cameras installed on the
vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn
TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to
be active), press CAM repeatedly or use
the center console controls. If the front
camera is on, it overrides the optional park
assist system's visual indicator but there
will still be an audible signal.
04

Limitations
Even if a fairly small section of the screen image
appears to be obstructed, this may mean that
a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hidden and objects there may not be detected
until they are very near the vehicle.

NOTE
Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's field of view.

Keep in mind

• Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and
snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to
avoid scratching the lens.

• Clean the lens regularly with warm water
and a suitable car washing detergent.

ing CAM. By default, the system is activated when the gear selector is moved to

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

181

04 Driver support
Blind Spot Information System*
Introduction

WARNING

•

BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.

•

BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to turn
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes.

•
G031404

As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes in a safe manner.

BLIS camera
Indicator light
BLIS symbol
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an
information system that indicates the presence
of another vehicle moving in the same direction
as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind
area."

CAUTION

The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras are located beneath the
side-view mirrors.
When one (or both) of the cameras have
detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of
your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.
(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see
the illustration, the indicator light in the door
panel illuminates. The light will glow continuously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the
blind area.

NOTE
The door panel indicator light illuminates on
the side of the vehicle where the system has
detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is
passed on both sides at the same time, both
lights will illuminate.

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
driver if a fault should occur with the system.
For example, if one or both of the system's
cameras are obscured, a message (see the
table on page 184) will appear in the information display in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,
the system can be temporarily switched off (for
instructions, see page 184).

The BLIS system should only be repaired by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx.
31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft.
(3 meters)

182

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Blind Spot Information System*
When does BLIS function

Darkness

The system functions when your vehicle is
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding
vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a
vehicle in the blind area must have its headlights on. This means, for example, that the
system will not detect a trailer without headlights that is being towed behind a car or truck.

When you pass another vehicle:
The system reacts when you pass another
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)
faster than that vehicle.

WARNING

When you are passed by another vehicle:
The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by
another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph
(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

•
•
•

BLIS does not function in sharp curves.
BLIS does not function when your vehicle is backing up.
If you are towing a wide trailer, this may
prevent the BLIS cameras from detecting other vehicles in adjacent lanes.

NOTE

•

BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.

•

BLIS does not react to vehicles that are
standing still.

•

The BLIS cameras have the same limitation as the human eye. In other words,
their "vision is impaired" by adverse
weather conditions such as heavy
snowfall, intense light directly into the
camera, dense fog, etc.

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occasionally even when there are no other vehicles in the blind area, this does not indicate
a fault in the system.
In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.
Service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situations in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may
illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system.

Limitations
How BLIS functions in daylight and
darkness

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)
may illuminate even when there are no other
vehicles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface

Daylight
BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect
motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
motorcycles, etc.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

183

04 Driver support
Blind Spot Information System*
CAUTION

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on
a highway

•

Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.

•

The lenses are electrically heated to
help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gently brush away snow from the lenses.

Switching BLIS on and off

switched off, and a text message is displayed.

• BLIS can be switched on again by pressing
the button. The indicator light in the button
will illuminate and a new text message will
be displayed. Press the OK button (see
page 189) to erase the message.
Depending on the vehicle's optional equipment, there may not be space for the BLIS button in the center console. In this case, BLIS can
be switched on and off in the menu system by
pressing MY CAR and going to Settings
Car settings BLIS. See page 191 for a
description of the menu system.

BLIS system messages

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low
on the horizon

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses
In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera
lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped
clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

184

BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will
provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

• The system can be switched off by press-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

ing the BLIS button in the center console
(see the illustration). The indicator light in
the button goes out when the system is

Text in the display

System status

Blind spot syst.
Service required

BLIS not functioning
properly. Contact an
authorized Volvo
service technician.

Blind spot syst.
Camera blocked

BLIS camera
obscured. Clean the
lenses.

Blind-spot info
system ON

BLIS system on

04 Driver support
Blind Spot Information System*
Text in the display

System status

Blind-spot info
system OFF

BLIS system off

Blind spot syst.
Reduced function

The BLIS cameras'
function has been
reduced due to
weak or impaired
data transfer
between the BLIS
system's cameras
and the vehicle's
electrical system.
The cameras will
reset themselves
when this data
transfer has
returned to normal.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

185

Volvo Sensus........................................................................................
Menus and messages...........................................................................
The MY CAR menus..............................................................................
Climate system.....................................................................................
Trip computer........................................................................................
Active chassis system–Four C*.............................................................
Passenger compartment convenience.................................................

186

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

188
189
191
197
205
207
208

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Volvo Sensus
Introduction

as well as other options such as the park assist
camera(s), etc.
Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center
instrument panel to display information and
selections are made using this panel’s controls
and buttons. Certain features can also be controlled using the steering wheel keypad.
Press MY CAR to present all of the available
settings related to driving and/or controlling
the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the
clock, lock settings, etc.

Center console control panel
05

Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV:
see the separate VNS manual for operating
instructions.
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL): see
page 214 .
Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see
page 191.

Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM*
to change a source and to activated systems
or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD, Bluetooth, navigation* and the park assist camera
*.
See the respective sections in this manual for
more detailed information about your vehicle's
various features and functions.

Park assist camera - CAM*: see page 178.
Climate system: see page 197.
Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your
vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a
number of functions such as the individualized
settings that can be made in the MY CAR
menus, the climate and infotainment systems

188

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Main instrument panel

Average

Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among
the messages.

Instantaneous
Average speed

NOTE

Current speed in mph (Canadian models
only)

Calibrate tire pressure*

If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read and confirmed by pressing OK
before the previous activity can be
resumed.

Messages

Message

Description

Stop engineA

Stop and switch off
the engine as soon
as possible. Serious
risk of damage.
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine oil level*

Information display and menu controls

OK – access to the list of messages and
message confirmation.
Thumb wheel – browse among menus and
options in the list of functions.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
The menus shown on the information displays
in the instrument panel are controlled with the
left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition
mode. Press OK to erase a message and return
to the menus.

Menu overview

Stop safelyA

When a warning, information or indicator symbol comes on, a corresponding message
appears on the information display. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault is rectified.

Stop and switch off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.

Driving distance on current fuel reserve

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

189

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Message

Description

Message

Description

Service urgentA

Have the vehicle
checked by an
authorized Volvo
workshop immediately.

Maintenance overdue

Service requiredA

Have the vehicle
checked by an
authorized Volvo
workshop as soon
as possible.

If the service intervals are not followed, the warranty
does not cover any
damaged parts.
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop
for service.

Temporarily OFFA

A function has been
temporarily
switched off and is
reset automatically
while driving or after
starting again.

Low battery Power
save mode

The audio system is
switched off to save
current. Charge the
battery.

See manualA

Read the owner's
manual.

Book time for
maintenance

Time to book service
at an authorized
Volvo retailer.

Time for regular
maintenance

Time for regular
service at an authorized Volvo workshop. The timing is
determined by the
number of miles
driven, number of
months since the
last service, engine
running time.

190

There will also be a system-specific part of this message

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
Introduction
The menu system provides access to
menus for operating many of the vehicle's functions, such as setting the
clock, door mirrors, locks, etc.

Operation
Center console controls

• Reject and incoming phone call
• The current function will be cancelled
• Characters that have been entered will be
erased

• The most recent selection will be cancelled
• Go back (upward) in the menu system

Navigating in the menus is done using the buttons on the center console control panel or with
the right-side steering wheel keypad.

A long press will take you to the highest menu
level (the main view), giving you access to all of
the vehicles/menus. See page 215 for additional information.

Some of the features mentioned in this section
are optional.

Steering wheel keypad
Center console controls for menu navigation

Press MY CAR to access the My Car
menus.
Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted
selection or to store a certain function in
the system's memory.
Turn to navigate up/down among menu
selections.
EXIT

EXIT functions
The results of a short press on EXIT vary,
depending on where the cursor is and where
you are in the menu structure.

The keypad varies according to the vehicle's
equipment

Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down
among menu selections. Press the thumb

191

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
wheel to make a selection or store a function in the system's memory.
EXIT.

Paths
The current menu level is displayed at the
upper right of the center console display. Menu
paths are displayed as follows, for example:
Settings Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all
The following is an example of how to set a
function in the menu system:
05

6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the
desired choice and press the thumb wheel
to put an X in the box.
7. Finish by exiting the menu system either
one step at a time with short presses on
EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to
return to the main menu.
The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in
the center console can be used in the same
way.

MY CAR
When the MY CAR symbol has been selected,
the following menu alternatives are displayed.

2. Navigate to a menu, for example
Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and
press it to open a submenu.
3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as
Car settings.
4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the
thumb wheel to open a new submenu.

192

MY CAR

My XC60

The display shows all of the vehicle's driver
support systems, which can be activated/
deactivated here.

1. Press the MY CAR button on the center
console control panel.

5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the
thumb wheel to open a submenu with alternatives that can be selected.

My XC60

• My XC60
• Support systems
• Settings

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
Driver support systems

Doors unlock
All doors
Driver door, then all
Keyless entry
All doors
Any door
Doors on same side

See page 57 for more information.
Approach light duration
Off
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
See page 59 for more information.

Both front doors
Audible confirmation
See page 57 and 64 for more information.
MY CAR

Support systems

(MY CAR > Support systems)
The screen shows the current status (settings)
for the vehicle's driver support systems.

Reduced Guard
Activate once
Ask when exiting
See page 71 for more information.

Menu settings
The following pages list the main menus/submenus and possible selections.
Car key memory
See pages 88 and 57 for more information.
Lock settings
Automatic door locking

Side mirror settings
Fold mirrors
Tilt left mirror

Home safe light duration
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec

See page 101 for more information.
Triple indicator
See page 99 for more information.
Daytime running lights
See page 94 for more information.

Tilt right mirror
See page 107 for more information.
Light settings
Door lock confirmation light
Unlock confirmation light

Active bending lights
See page 97 for more information.
Tire pressure system
Warns if tyre pressure is too low

193

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
Calibrate tire pressure

Lane Departure Warning

Steering wheel force
High

Increased sensitivity

See page 82 for more information.

See page 207 for more information.

Off

Speed alert

This feature returns the "Car settings" menu to
the original factory settings.

On
Off

MY CAR
systems

Settings

Driver support

DSTC
See page 134 for more information.

Collision Warning

City Safety

Collision Warning

See page 154 for more information.

Warning distance

BLIS

Long

See page 182 for more information.

Normal

Distance Alert

Short

See page 151 for more information.

Warning sound
See page 162 for more information.

Driver Alert
See page 168 for more information.

Time format
12 h
24 h
Screen saver
The contents of the screen are replaced by
another image if this selection is marked. The
contents of the screen will be displayed again
if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see
page 191.
Uncheck the selection to turn the screen saver
off.
Language
Select the language for menu texts.
Show help text
This displays help texts for the current menu.
Distance and fuel units
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
l/100km

194

System options

Set/change time

Road Sign Information

Low

Reset car settings

Settings

On at start-up

See page 171 for more information.

Medium

MY CAR

Lane Departure Warning

See page 316 for more information. This system is optional in Canada.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
See page 205 for more information about the
trip computer.
Temperature unit

Phone call contact

Fahrenheit

Phone dial number

Select the temperature scale to be displayed
by the climate control unit.
Volume levels
Voice output volume
Front park assist volume
Rear park assist volume
Phone ringing volume

This feature returns the "System options"
menu to the original factory settings.

Voice settingsA.

Only on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System
and/or a Bluetooth-connected cell phone

Voice tutorial
Select this menu alternative and press OK for
spoken information about how the system
works.

Voice user setting
Default setting
User 1
User 2

Navigation

Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if
more than one person uses voice commands
regularly. Default setting resets the factory
settings.

Navigation repeat instruction

Voice training

Navigation commands

Navigation go to address
General commands
Help
Cancel

Reset system options

Settings

Phone commands
Phone

Celsius

MY CAR

Voice command list

Voice tutorial
The menu alternatives under Phone
commands show examples of the voice commands available when a cell phone is connected to the Bluetooth hands-free system.
See page 251 for more detailed information.
The menu alternatives under Navigation
commands show examples of the voice commands available for the optional Volvo
Navigation System. Refer to the navigation
system's manual for detailed information.

User 1
User 2

Voice training enables the system to become
familiar with the driver's voice and pronunciation. A list of phrases is presented on the
screen for the driver to read aloud. When the
system has registered the driver's pronunciation, no additional phrases will be displayed.
After completed voice training, select User 1
or User 2 in Voice user setting to set the system to the current user.

Voice output volume

• A volume control will be displayed. To set
the volume level:
1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel
2. Test the setting by pressing OK
3. Store the setting and leave the menu by
pressing EXIT.
``

195

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
This feature returns the "Climate settings"
menu to the original factory settings.

Voice POI list
Edit list
The navigation system has a large number of
points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30 POIs
can be stored in this list.
The menu alternative Voice POI list is only
displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the
optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the
navigation system's manual for detailed information.

For more information about the climate system, see page 197.
MY CAR

Settings

Favourites (FAV)

See page 220 for more information about this
feature.
MY CAR

MY CAR

Settings

Information

Audio settings
Number of keys

See page 214 for more information about the
infotainment system.
MY CAR

Settings

Climate settings

See page 56 for more information.
VIN number
See page 359 for more information.
DivX® VOD code

Automatic blower adjustment

Bluetooth software version in car

High

See page 224 for more information.

Low

Map and software version

Recirculation timer
Automatic rear defroster
Interior air quality system
Reset climate settings

196

See page 236 for more information.

Normal

Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System
manual for more information.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Introduction
Air conditioning
The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate
Control (ECC). The climate control system
cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.

NOTE
The sunlight sensor monitors which side of
the car that is most exposed to sunlight.
This can mean that the temperature may
differ between the right and left-side air
vents, even if the temperatures set for both
sides of the passenger compartment are the
same.

NOTE

•

The air conditioning can be switched
off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to prevent the windows
from misting, it should always be on.

• The temperature sensor for the passenger

In warm weather, a small amount of
water may accumulate under the car
when it has been parked. This water is
condensation from the A/C system and
is normal.

• The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-

Sensor location

• The sunlight sensor is located on the top
side of the dashboard.

compartment is located below the climate
control panel.

• The outside (ambient) temperature sensor
is located on the door mirror.
rior rearview mirror.

NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.

mercially available window washing spray will
also help prevent fogging or misting.

Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
The air conditioning is momentarily disengaged during full-throttle acceleration or when
driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a
temporary increase in cabin temperature.

Ice and snow
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.

Climate system maintenance
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
system. Work of this type should only be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Refrigerant

Side windows and laminated panoramic
roof
To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally, the side windows, and the laminated
panoramic roof should be closed.

Volvo cares about the environment. The air
conditioning system in your car contains a
CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance
will not deplete the ozone layer. The air conditioning system contains 1.8 lbs (820 g) of
R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.

Passenger compartment filter

Fog on the inside of the windows
The defroster function should be used to
remove fog or mist from the inside of the windows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

197

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, or consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for these intervals.
The filter should be replaced more often when
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should
always be replaced with a new one.

NOTE
There are different types of cabin air filters.
Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
05

A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles
in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels
of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased
levels of contaminants in the outside air. When
the air quality sensor detects contaminated
outside air, the air intake closes and the air
inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The
filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.

NOTE
Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter
replacement intervals.

198

Materials used in the cabin

Air distribution

The materials used in the cabin have been
developed to help minimize the amount of dust
and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All
floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning.
Use car cleaning products recommended by
Volvo. See also the information beginning on
page 352.

Menu settings
The default settings for four of the climate system's functions can be changed in the menu
system.

• Blower speed in automatic mode.
• Recirculation timer for passenger compartment air.

• Automatic rear window defrosting.
• The optional Interior Air Quality System
(IAQS).
The functions can also be returned to factory
settings in the menu system.
See page 191 for a description of the menu
system.

The incoming air is distributed from a number
of different vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode.
If desired, air distribution can be controlled
manually, see page 204.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Air vents in the dashboard

Air vents in the door pillars

Open

Closed

Open

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.

Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.
Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature
in the rear seat.

199

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Electronic climate control, ECC

Temperature control, driver's side

Heated front passenger's seat*

Heated driver's seat*

Temperature control, passenger's side

Defroster (maximum effect)

Recirculation

Blower

AUTO

Manual air distribution—floor

A/C on/off

Manual air distribution—dashboard air
vents
Manual air distribution—defroster
Heated rear window and door mirrors, see
page 108

200

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Climate system controls

Seat heating will automatically switch off when
the engine is switched off.

Heated front seats*
Heated rear seats*1

NOTE
If the blower is turned off completely, the air
conditioning is disengaged, which may
result in fogging on the windows.

Air distribution

The current seat temperature is shown in the center console display

Press the button once for the
highest heat level – three indicator lights come on.

Heat control for the outboard seating positions
is done in the same way as for the front seats.

Blower control

Press the button twice for a
lower heat level – two indicator lights come on.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one indicator light comes on.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no indicator lights come on.

Manual air distribution—defroster

Turn the control clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the blower
speed. If AUTO is selected,
blower speed will be regulated automatically and this will
override manual adjustment.

Manual air distribution—dashboard air
vents
Manual air distribution—floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When a
button is pressed, the corresponding figure will
appear in the display with an arrow indicating
which manual air flow has been selected (see

Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

201

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
the following illustration). See also the air distribution chart on page 204.

Blower speed in automatic mode can be set
under Climate settings Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
or High.

NOTE
Selecting the lowest blower speed may
increases the risk of fog forming on the windows.

Temperature control

The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set separately. When
the vehicle is started, the
most recent setting is
resumed.

Air distribution is shown in the center console display

Auto
The function automatically
regulates cooling, heating,
blower speed, recirculation,
and air distribution to maintain the chosen temperature.
If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled automatically.
The air quality sensor is engaged and all manual settings are switched off when AUTO is
pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.

A/C – ON/OFF
When the indicator light in the
button is on, the air conditioning is controlled automatically. This cools/heats and
dehumidifies the incoming air.
When the indicator light in the
button is off, the air conditioning is disengaged. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When maximum
defroster is selected, the air conditioning system is set for maximum blower speed and
dehumidification.

Defroster
This function defrosts/de-ices
the windshield and front side
windows. The indicator light
in the defroster button lights
when the function is active.

NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.

• Blower speed increases automatically and
the air conditioning will switch on (if not
already on and if the passenger compartment blower is not turned off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment.
Air conditioning can be switched off by
pressing the AC button.

• Recirculation will not function while defrost
is engaged.

202

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
The climate system will return to its previous
settings when the defroster function is
switched off.

Recirculation/air quality system
Recirculation
This function can be used to
shut out exhaust fumes,
smoke, etc., from the passenger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is then recirculated, i.e., no air
from outside the car is taken
into the car when this function is activated. The
indicator light in the button will illuminate when
recirculation is selected.
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in winter.

Timer
The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging, or stale air when the recirculation function

is selected by automatically switching off the
function after a certain length of time, depending on the ambient temperature. Activate/
deactivate the function under Climate
settings Recirculation timer. See page
191 for a description of the menu system.

enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air. When the
AUTO button is depressed the air quality sensor is always engaged.
Activate or deactivate this function in Climate
settings Interior air quality system.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation is
always deactivated.

Interior Air Quality System–IAQS*
This system consists of a multifilter and an air
quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases
and particles from the incoming air, thereby
reducing the amounts of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased levels of contaminants in
the outside air. When the air quality sensor
detects contaminated outside air, the air intake
closes and the air inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air

•

The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air
in the passenger compartment.

•

Recirculation is limited in cold weather
to avoid fogging.

•

If the insides of the windows start fogging, disengage the air quality sensor.
Use the defroster function to increase
airflow to the front, side, and rear windows.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

203

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Air distribution table
Air distribution

Use

Air distribution

Use

Air to windows. Some air
flows from the dashboard
air vents. The air is not
recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.

To remove de-fog/deice the front side windows and windshield
quickly.

Air to the floor and windows.
Some air flows from the
dashboard air vents.

To ensure comfortable
conditions and good defogging in cold or humid
weather.

Air to windshield and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air dashboard
vents.

In cold or humid
weather (blower
speed should be
moderate to high).

Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.

In sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.

Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.

To ensure good comfort in warm, dry
weather.

Air to floor. Some air flows to
the dashboard air vents and
windows.

To warm or cool the feet.

Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.

To ensure efficient
cooling in warm
weather.

Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and to
the floor.

To cool the feet or provide warmer air to the
upper body in cold
weather or hot, dry
weather.

204

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Introduction

Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, this message must
be acknowledged in order to return to the
trip computer function. Acknowledge a
message by pressing OK.

To change the unit of measure specified for
distance and speed, contact an authorized
Volvo workshop.
Information display and controls

Average speed

OK–press to acknowledge/confirm/erase
a message)

The system calculates the average speed from
the last resetting. Reset using RESET.

Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip
computer menus)

Current speed in mph (Canadian models
only)

RESET–resets certain functions

This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed
from km/h to mph.

To scroll through trip computer information,
move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue
turning to return to the starting point.

Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only)
This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed
from mph to km/h.

Current fuel consumption
(Instantaneous)
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is

updated every few seconds. When the vehicle
is stationary, "----" appears on the display.

Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the last
reset. Reset using RESET.

Driving distance on current fuel reserve
This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank. The calculation is based on average fuel
consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)
of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank when the reading was taken. When the
message ---- miles to empty tank appears in
the display, refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE
The actual distance that can be driven on
the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be
influenced by a change in driving style.

See also page 268 for information on driving
economically.

Resetting
1. Select --- mph average speed or --.mpg average.
2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If
RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three

205

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
seconds, Average speed and Average fuel
consumption are reset simultaneously.

206

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Active chassis system–Four C*
Active chassis (Four C)
Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the
car's driving characteristics can be adjusted.
There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and
Advanced.

ing is done at high rpm in each gear for
dynamic and active driving.

Select Low, Medium or High. For a description of the menu system, see page 191.

Operation

NOTE
This steering force level menu function cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in
motion.

NOTE
This system is available on Canadian models only.

Comfort
Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride
and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm.
This mode is particularly suitable for long-distance highway driving. The indicator light in the
button will be on when this mode is selected.

Sport
In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is
reduced during cornering and steering
response is more immediate. The transmission
shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The
indicator light in the button will be on to indicate that Sport mode has been selected.

Advanced
In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal
and steering response is very direct. Gear shift-

05
Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console to
change setting. The setting in use when the
engine is switched off is activated the next time
the engine is started.

Speed-dependent steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in
order to facilitate parking, etc.
Steering force can be changed under MY CAR
Car settings Steering wheel force.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

207

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Storage spaces

208

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Compartment in door panel

Tunnel console

Glove compartment

Storage pocket on the front edge of the
front seat cushions
Glove compartment
Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and
AUX input/USB connector*
Jacket holder
Rear seat cup holders
Storage pocket

Jacket holder
The jacket hanger is located on the inboard
side of the front passenger's seat head
restraint. It is only intended for hanging light
garments.

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under
armrest, AUX input/USB connector.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger, 12-volt socket and small storage compartment.

The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here. There are also holders for pens and fuel
cards. The glove compartment can be locked
manually with the key blade, see page 68.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

209

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Vanity mirror

12-volt sockets

ignition must be in at least mode I, see
page 84.

Vanity mirror with lighting
05

G031435

G021438

The maximum current consumption is 10A
(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the
passenger compartment is in use. If both the
front and rear sockets are used at the same
time, the maximum current consumption per
socket is 7.5A (90W).

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

The auxiliary sockets can also be used to
power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette
lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from
your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

The light comes on automatically when the
cover is lifted.

Always keep the sockets covered when not
in use.

G021440

12-volt socket in the cargo area*

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt
accessories such as cell phone chargers and
coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

210

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Fold down the cover to access the electrical
socket.

NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while
the engine is not running will drain the battery.

211

Introduction...........................................................................................
Radio.....................................................................................................
Media player.........................................................................................
AUX/USB sockets.................................................................................

214
225
234
238

Bluetooth media ................................................................................. 241
Bluetooth® hands-free connection ......................................................
Cell phone voice control.......................................................................
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* ...........................................................
Remote control*....................................................................................

212

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

243
251
255
264

INFOTAINMENT

06 Infotainment
Introduction
General information
The infotainment system consists of radio and
media player features and also makes it possible to communicate via a cell phone. The
information is displayed on a 7" screen in the
center console. Infotainment functions can be
controlled from the center console or via the
buttons on the steering wheel keypad. On
models equipped with the optional navigation
system, voice commands can also be used to
e.g., set destinations, make calls from a
Bluetooth-connected cell phone, etc.
If the infotainment system was on when the
ignition was switched off, the most recently
used source (FM1, etc.) will restart the next
time the ignition is put in mode I or higher. The
driver's door must also be closed on vehicles
with keyless drive*.
06

The infotainment system can be operated for
15 minutes at a time while the engine is
switched off by pressing the On/Off button.
While the engine is being started, the infotainment system will be temporarily interrupted
and will resume when the engine has started.

214

NOTE

Audyssey MultEQ1

To help avoid excessive battery drain,
remove the remote key from the ignition slot
if the infotainment system is used while the
engine is switched off.

Dolby Pro Logic

The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
to optimize sound quality to help ensure a
world-class listening experience.

The system is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
symbol are
Dolby Pro Logic II and the
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.

Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Infotainment system overview

Sockets for external audio sources (AUX
and USB)

Basic infotainment functions

Infotainment controls in the center console

Corresponding controls - keypad and center console

Steering wheel keypad

SOUND: press to access the menu for
adjusting bass, treble, etc., see page 220
for additional information.

7" display

VOL: turn to raise or lower the volume level.

Center console control panel

ON/OFF/MUTE: short press - switch
the system ON. Press and hold (until the
screen turns black) - switch the system
OFF. A short press when the infotainment
system is on will mute/unmute the sound.
The entire infotainment system, including
the navigation* and telephone functions, is
switched on/off at the same time by using
this button.

Rear seat control panel with headphone
socket*
Not in use

Mode buttons: select a mode (e.g.,
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.) by pressing its
button on the center console. The most
``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

215

06 Infotainment
Introduction
recent source in the selected mode (e.g.,
FM1) will be displayed. The location of
these buttons on the center console may
vary slightly from model to model.
OK/MENU: confirm a menu selection. This
leads to the selected mode’s (RADIO,
MEDIA) menu view. Arrows at the right of
the screen indicate submenus.
TUNE: turn to scroll among tracks/folders,
radio stations, phone contacts or to navigate among the alternatives shown on the
screen.

"* FAV—storing a shortcut" on page 220
for information on using this button.

Steering wheel keypad
The buttons on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad can be used in the same way as some
of the controls on the center console. There are
two versions of the keypad, depending on your
vehicle's specifications.

# INFO: if more information is available
than is currently displayed on the screen,
press # INFO to display the remaining
information.
Keypad (for preset stations, entering letters or numbers, etc).
* FAV: this button can be used to store a
shortcut to a commonly used function in
AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the section
2

216

Main view
From a mode’s normal view, pressing and
holding EXIT will display the infotainment system's main view, which enables you to select
a mode.
Left/right arrow keys: a short press moves
between preset radio stations or tracks on
a disc. Press and hold to search within
tracks or to tune to the next/previous
strong radio station.
Volume

Models with the optional navigation system only. On models without navigation, this button mutes/unmutes the infotainment system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Thumb wheel: pressing functions in the
same way OK/MENU on the center console. Turning the thumb wheel functions in
the same way as TUNE on the center console.
Voice button: 2 press to voice-activate certain functions on a Bluetooth-connected
cell phone and the navigation system.

EXIT: short press - go upward in the menu
system, cancel a current function, reject an
incoming phone call or erase characters
that have been entered on the screen.
Press and hold - from a mode’s main view
to come to the infotainment system's main
view, see page 218.

EXIT: a short press takes you upward in
the menu system, cancels a current function, rejects an incoming phone call or erases characters that have been entered on
the screen. Press and hold from a mode’s
main view to come to the infotainment system's main view.

NAV: Navigation system*

RADIO

06 Infotainment
Introduction
MEDIA: (DISC, USB, etc.)

TEL: Bluetooth hands-free

MY CAR: Driving-related settings

CAM: Park assist camera*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

217

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Menu navigation

An example of menu navigation in MEDIA mode when a CD is playing

218

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Mode button (in this example, the MEDIA
button). The number of buttons varies,
depending on your vehicle’s specifications). Each mode has four basic views:

Scroll/search forward and back
Press briefly on (2) to scroll between CD tracks/
audio files or to search for the next available
radio station.

Normal view

Limitations

Shortcut view

NOTE

Quick scroll view
Menu view
Select a mode by pressing its button (1)
(RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.). Navigate using
TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT.

Volume control (right/left sides)
Scroll/search forward and back

Rear control panel with headphone
sockets*
Headphones with an impedance of
16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher
are recommended for best sound reproduction.

•

The sound source (AM, FM1, Disc,
etc.) being played through the infotainment system's speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel.

•

In order to select and play an external
device using MODE, the device must be
connected to the infotainment system.

MODE – select: AM, FM1, FM2,HD
Radio3, SAT1*, SAT2*, Disc, USB, iPod,
Bluetooth, AUX and ON/OFF.
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)

Activating/deactivating
The control panel is activated by pressing
MODE when the infotainment system is
switched on. It is switched off automatically
when the infotainment system is switched off
or by a long press on MODE.

U.S. models only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

219

06 Infotainment
Introduction
* FAV—storing a shortcut

• iPod
• Bluetooth
• AUX
Favorites can also be stored for MY CAR,
CAM* and NAV*. See page 191 for a description of the menu system.
To program a function on the * FAV button:

The * FAV button can be used to store frequently used functions, making it possible to
start the stored function by simply pressing * FAV. One favorite (for example,
Equalizer) can be programmed for each of the
following infotainment system functions:

Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
the new setting by pressing OK/MENU.
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
display:

2. Press and hold * FAV until the "favorite"
menu is displayed.

• Surround:4 Can be set to On or Off. When

3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of
alternatives displayed and press OK/
MENU to confirm (store) your choice.
> The next time the infotainment system
mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is selected,
a short press on * FAV will start the
stored function.

• AM
• FM1/FM2
• SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2*
In MEDIA mode

• DISC
• USB

220

Press SOUND to display the basic sound setting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the other
setting alternatives.

1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).

In RADIO mode

Basic sound settings

Premium Sound Multimedia only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

switched on, the system will automatically
select settings for the best sound quality,
which is normally DPLII and
will
appear in the display. If the recording was
made using Dolby Digital technology, playback will be provided with this setting and
will appear in the display. If Surround is switched off, audio will be provided using 3 channel stereo.

• Bass: Bass level.
• Treble: Treble level.
• Fader: Balance between the front and rear
speakers.

• Balance: Balance between the right and
left speakers.

06 Infotainment
Introduction
• Subwoofer*: subwoofer volume level.
• DPL II centre level/3 channel centre
level4: Volume for the center speaker.

• DPL II surround level4/5: Surround level.
Advanced sound settings
Equalizer
Sound levels for different frequencies can be
adjusted separately using this feature.
To do so:
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio
settings and select Equalizer
2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies
and press OK/MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting and
confirm the change by pressing OK/
MENU. Do the same for the other frequencies.
4. When you have finished making your settings, press EXIT to save and return to normal view.
For general information regarding menu navigation, see page 218 and menu overview see
page 222.
4
5
6

Sound stage6
The sound experience can be optimized for the
driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.
If the front and rear seats are occupied, the
sound stage setting Front seats is recommended. Select one of the options under
Audio settings Sound stage.

Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The infotainment system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment
by increasing the volume according to the
speed of the vehicle. The level of sound compensation can be set at low, medium, high or
off. Select the level under Audio settings
Volume compensation.

adjust the input volume of the external audio
source:

NOTE
Sound quality may be affected if the MP3
player is being charged while the system is
in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid
charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt socket
while it is being played.

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX.
Press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad.
2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX
input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume.

External audio source volume
If an external device such as an MP3 player or
an iPod is connected to the AUX socket, the
device's volume may be different than the volume of the internal sound sources such as the
disc player or the radio. If the external sound
source's volume is too high, the quality of the
sound may be impaired. To help prevent this,

Optimal sound reproduction

The infotainment system is pre-calibrated for
optimal sound reproduction using digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account factors such
as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the
listeners' seating positions, etc., for each combination of vehicle/infotainment system.

Premium Sound Multimedia only
Only when Surround is on.
Premium Sound Multimedia only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

221

06 Infotainment
Introduction
There is also a dynamic calibration that takes
into consideration the volume level, radio
reception, and the speed of the vehicle.

Main FM1/FM2 menu
FM menu

The settings that are described in this manual,
(Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only
intended to enable the user to adapt sound
reproduction to his/her personal tastes.

Channel list information

Show radio text

Station name

Show presets

Artist

Scan

Title

Advanced settings
Reset all FM settings

Infotainment system menus

Audio settings8

RADIO menus
Main AM menu

Main SAT1*/SAT2* menu (SiriusXM൅
൅
satellite radio)

AM menu

SAT1

Scan

Audio settings8
06

Sound

SAT2
SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button
to activate SIRIUS.

stage9

Equalizer10

Song memory

Volume compensation
Reset all audio settings

Add song
Song Seek
Delete song

7 High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia only.
8 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes
9 Premium Sound Multimedia only.
10 To reach sub menus, see "Main menu AM.

222

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information
Show presets
Category list
Advanced SIRIUS settings
Skip options
Channel skip list

SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button
to activate SIRIUS.

Show presets7

View song memory

Lock options
Channel lock list
Unlock all channels
Temporarily unlock all channels
Change code

Audio settings8

06 Infotainment
Introduction
MEDIA menus

Stop

Main CD Audio menu

Subtitles

Scan

Disc menu

Audio tracks

Audio settings8

Random

Advanced settings

Scan

Angle

Audio settings8

Main

CD/DVD11

Change audio track

Data menu

Disc menu

Play/Pause

DivX® VOD code

Audio settings8

AUX input volume

Audio settings8

Main iPod menu
iPod menu

TEL menus

Stop

Random

Main Bluetooth media menu

Random

Scan

Bluetooth menu

Repeat folder

Audio settings8

Change audio track

Random
Change device

Change subtitles

Main USB menu
USB menu

Scan

Play/Pause

Audio settings8

Stop

Main DVD11 Video menu

Random

DVD Video Menu

Repeat folder

8 The
11 The

Main AUX menu
AUX menu

DVD disc menu

Select USB device

Play/Pause/Continue

Change subtitles

Remove Bluetooth device

Scan
Bluetooth software version in car

Audio settings8

audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes
media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system.

223

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Main Bluetooth hands-free menu
Phone menu

Auto answer

Call lists
All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
Phone book
Search
New contact
Speed dials
Receive vCard
Memory status
06

Clear phone book
Change phone
Remove Bluetooth device
Phone settings
Discoverable
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
Bluetooth software version in
car

224

Call options

Voicemail number
Disconnect phone

06 Infotainment
Radio
General functions

RADIO menu selections can be made from the
center console or the steering wheel keypad,
see page 216 for more information.

Selecting a station (in wavebands AM/
FM1/FM2)
Automatic tuning
1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE to toggle to the
desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and
press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad.
RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1,
FM2, SAT1* or SAT2* wavebands.
Keypad (buttons 0-9)
Navigate among the menu alternatives in
the display by turning TUNE or the thumb
wheel on the steering wheel keypad.
Confirm your selection or access the radio
menus by pressing OK/MENU or the
thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad.
Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to go
to the next/previous strong station, press
briefly to tune to a preset station.

currently tuned station will be indicated in
the list by magnified text.

Menu navigation

2. Press
/
keys on the center console
control panel or steering wheel keypad to
search for the next available station.

List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2
only)
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest FM stations whose signals are currently being received. This enables you to find
stations when driving in areas where radio stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar.
To access this list:
1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or
FM2).
2. Turn TUNE slightly in either direction. This
displays the list of stations in the area. The

3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to
select a station on the list.
4. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU or the
thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad.

NOTE

•

This list will only display the frequencies
of the stations currently being received,
not a complete list of all radio frequencies on the currently selected waveband.

•

If the signal from the currently tuned
station is weak, this may prevent the
radio from updating the list of stations.
while the list
If this occurs, press
of stations is displayed to switch to
manual tuning mode and select a station. If the list of stations is no longer
displayed, turn TUNE in either direction
to display the list again and press
.

The list will disappear from the display after
several seconds.
If the station list is no longer displayed, turn
on the
TUNE in either direction and press

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

225

06 Infotainment
Radio
keypad on the center console to switch to
manual tuning (or to switch back from manual
tuning to the "list of stations" function).

Manual tuning
By default, the list of stations of the strongest
stations in the area will be displayed when you
turn TUNE (see the preceding section, "List of
stations"). While the list of stations is displayed,
on the center console keypad to
press
switch to manual tuning, which enables you to
select a frequency from the complete list of all
radio frequencies available on the currently
selected waveband. In other words, in manual
tuning mode, turning TUNE one step will
change from e.g., 93.3 to 93.5, etc.).
To manually tune a station:

1. Press RADIO. Turn TUNE to scroll to the
desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and
press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad to confirm.
2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel to select a
frequency.

The radio is initially set to automatically
search for stations in the area in which you
are driving (see the preceding section, "List
of stations").
However, if you have switched to manual
tuning (by pressing
on the keypad on
the center console while the list of stations
is displayed), the radio will remain in manual
tuning mode the next time it is switched on.
To switch back to "list of stations" mode,
turn TUNE one step (to display the full list of
stations) and press
.
Please note that if you press
when the
list of stations is not displayed, this will activate the INFO function.

Storing preset stations
Ten preset stations can be stored for each
waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).
Stored preset stations are selected using the
buttons on the keypad on the center console.

Manually storing preset stations
1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a station"
on page 225).
2. Press and hold one of the number key buttons.
> The sound will be muted for several seconds and when it returns, the station has

226

been stored on the number key button
used.

NOTE

A list of preset stations can be displayed. This
function can be activated/deactivated in AM/
FM mode in FM menu Show presets or in
AM menu Show presets

Scan
The function automatically searches the current waveband for radio stations. When a station is found, it is played for several seconds
before scanning is resumed. While the station
is playing it can be stored as a preset in the
usual way (see "Manually storing preset stations").
–

To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to
FM menu Scan or in AM menu
Scan.

Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT.

NOTE
Storing a station interrupts the SCAN function.

Radio text
Some stations transmit information on program content, artists, etc. This information can
be shown on the display.

06 Infotainment
Radio
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show
radio text.

HD Radio൅
൅reception (U.S. models
only)
Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio
broadcast

NOTE
HD radio volume may fade in and out at
times due to coverage limitations.

developer of a broadcasting technology called
IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to
the method of transmitting a digital radio
broadcast signal centered on the same frequency as the AM or FM station's present frequency.
The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analogue and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to
receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD
radio receivers incorporate both modes of
reception, where the receiver will automatically
switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal
cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,
the
symbol will appear in the infotainment system display. The symbol is "grayedout" when HD Radio is in standby mode and
white when the radio is actively receiving an HD
broadcast.
More information about HD radio and IBOC
can be found on Ibiquity's website,
www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

• Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality
HD radio is a brand name registered by the
Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the

and AM as analogue FM).

• Some FM frequencies offer a greater number of listening choices through “multicast-

ing” (consisting of a frequency's main
channel and any sub-channels that may
also be available on that particular frequency. See also the section "Sub-channels" below).

• When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/
crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works
HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio
and broadcasts of this type are available in
many areas of the United States. However,
there are a few key differences:

• Instead of transmitting one analogue signal, stations send out a bundled signal –
both analogue and digital.

• An HD radio receiver can receive both digital and analogue broadcasts. Depending
on the terrain and location of the vehicle
(which will influence the signal strength),
the receiver will determine which signal to
receive.

Limitations

• Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM
only): The main channel is the only channel
that can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and analogue). If a frequency has subchannels, they are broadcast in digital

HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.

227

06 Infotainment
Radio
mode only. The main FM channel will be
displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC
(Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate
there are sub-channels available) The subFM channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2
WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

• Reception coverage area: Due to current
IBOC transmitter power limitations, the
reception coverage area in digital mode is
somewhat more limited than the station's
analogue coverage area. Please be aware
that as with any radio broadcast technology, terrain, time of day, foliage level and
building location can have positive or negative effects on radio reception.

• Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending will
occur as the signal strength reaches a preset threshold in the receiver. This will be
noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak
reception) and is normal.

NOTE
There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from analogue
to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such
as:

•
•

Volume increase or decrease

•

Time alignment (Digital program material in extreme cases can be as much as
8 seconds behind the analogue). This
will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/
Treble cut or boost

The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and do
not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio
receiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off

3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD
Radio.
4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will
disappear from the box on the display
screen).
This will disable the radio's capability to receive
digital broadcasts but it will continue to function as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM
receiver. Please note that when HD is switched
off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-channels (see the following section for a more
detailed explanation of sub-channels).
Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an X
will appear in the box on the display screen).
Please note that this will only switch HD on or
off for the selected waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).

Sub-channels

The factory setting for HD radio is off. If activated when driving through areas with weak
HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience
that the radio repeatedly switches between
analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to
switch HD off. To do so:
1. Be sure the infotainment system is
switched on and in one of the AM or FM
modes.
2. Press OK/MENU in the center console
control panel.

228

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

06 Infotainment
Radio
In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels
offering additional types of programming or
music.

•

In such cases, the “-” symbol will be displayed
to the left of the frequency number and a number will be displayed to the right of the frequency number indicating that the currently
tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel.

Selecting sub-channels
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press
and hold the right arrow key on the center console or on the steering wheel keypad for
approximately 1 second. To go back to the
main channel, press and hold the left arrow key
on the center console or on the steering wheel
keypad for approximately 1 second. To go to
subchannel 2 (if available), press and hold the
right arrow key on the center console or on the
steering wheel keypad for approximately
1 second.
If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main
channel, pressing and holding the left arrow
key for approximately 1 second will tune to the
next lower radio frequency.

SiriusXM൅ satellite radio*

NOTE

•

When the radio has gone into HD mode,
it may take several seconds before the
">" symbol (if the current frequency has
any sub-channels) is displayed to the
left of the frequency. Pressing and holding the arrow keys for approximately
1 second before the main-/sub-channel
icon is displayed will cause the radio to
tune to the next available radio station,
not to the current station's sub-channels.
When you are no longer in broadcasting
range of the currently tuned sub-channel, No reception will be displayed.
The radio will then be muted and it will
be necessary to tune to or search for a
new radio station.

Listening to satellite radio
The SiriusXM൅ satellite system consists of a
number of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous orbit.

NOTE

•

The digital signals from the satellites are
line-of-sight, which means that physical
obstructions such as bridges, tunnels,
etc, may temporarily interfere with signal reception.

•

Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or
in a ski box, or other antennas that may
impede signals from the SiriusXM൅
satellites.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,
see page 226 for information on storing stations.

Selecting SiriusXM൅ radio mode

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it
may take up to 6 seconds before the channel
becomes audible. If you press this button while
you are out of digital range of the transmitter,
No reception will be displayed.

2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel on the
steering wheel keypad to scroll to the
desired waveband (SAT1 or SAT2) and
press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad.

1. With the infotainment system switched on,
press RADIO.

Activating SiriusXM൅ radio
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
audio, which means that the channel is

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

229

06 Infotainment
Radio
unsubscribed and the text Subscription
update needed is displayed (see also
"Selecting a channel").
2. Call SiriusXM൅ at 1-888-539-SIRIUS
(7474).
3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel, the
SiriusXM൅ ID will be displayed. The SiriusXM൅ ID can also be accessed from the
menu (press OK/MENU, turn TUNE to
scroll to the Advanced settings menu,
press OK/MENU, scroll to SIRIUS ID and
press OK/MENU to display the number).
4. Updating subscription will be displayed
while the subscription is being updated,
after which the display will return to the
normal view.

SiriusXM൅
൅ ID
06

The SiriusXM൅ ID (sometimes referred to as
the Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is
required when contacting the SiriusXM൅ Call
Center. It is used to activate your account and
when making any account transactions.

Selecting a channel category

3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of categories and press OK/MENU to make a
selection.
> The channels in the selected category
are displayed.

NOTE

•
•

The category All is default, which enables you to scroll through the entire list
of available satellite channels.
The channel categories are automatically updated several times a year. This
takes approximately two minutes and
will interrupt normal broadcasting. A
message will be displayed while updating is in progress. Information on channel or feature updates is available at
www.siriusxm.com.

Selecting a channel
There are three ways of tuning in a channel:

• Using the left and right arrow keys to go to
the next channel. Skipped channels (see
page 232) will be excluded.

1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels.

• By turning the TUNE control and selecting

2. Press EXIT.

• Through direct channel entry.

a channel from the list

NOTE

•

The numbers of skipped or locked
channels will not be displayed.

•

If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel can
be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"
on page 232.

Direct channel entry
The SiriusXM൅ satellite channels are in numerical order throughout all of the categories. To
access a channel directly:
1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list.
2. Use the keypad buttons to enter the channel's number.
3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to this
channel, even if it belongs to a category
other than the currently selected one.

Scanning
Scan automatically searches through the list of
satellite channels. The search will only be carried out in the selected category, see
page 226 for more detailed information on the
scan function.

Storing a channel
A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;
10 channels each for SAT1 and SAT2, see

230

06 Infotainment
Radio
page 226 for detailed information on storing
channels.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory and
press OK/MENU.

• A long press on one of the number keys

3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and
press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate
the function.

stores the currently tuned channel on that
key.

• A short press on a number key while the
radio is in SAT1 or SAT2 mode will tune to
the preset satellite channel stored on that
button, regardless of the currently selected
channel category.

Searching for and storing songs
The Song Seek function provides notification
when SiriusXM൅ is broadcasting the songs
selected in song memory. Song memory enables you to store the name of the song for
future advance notification when that song is
being played.

Song seek
When a satellite radio channel plays one of the
songs stored in the song memory while the
Song seek feature is activated, the listener will
be alerted by a text message and an audible
signal.
Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT
to cancel.
To activate/deactivate the song seek function:
1. Press OK/MENU.

Radio text
This text provides information about the song
that is currently playing. To turn this feature on
or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to Show
radio text and press OK/MENU to toggle
between on or off.

NOTE
When the song has ended, the radio will
remain tuned to the channel on which the
song was played.

Advanced SiriusXM൅ settings
This menu function enables you to make settings on certain SiriusXM൅ satellite radio functions. To access this menu:

Song memory

1. Press OK/MENU.

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's
memory.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu
and press OK/MENU.

To add the currently playing song to the list:
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/
MENU.
3. Scroll to Add current song to song
memory and press OK/MENU.
If a new song is selected when the memory is
full, you will be prompted to delete a song from
the list. To do so:
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of
songs. Select a song and press OK/
MENU to delete it from the list.

WARNING
Settings should be made when the vehicle
is at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the satellite menus:

• Channel skip settings can be made
• Channel lock settings can be made
• The channel access code can be displayed
or changed (see also "Locking a channel"
on page 232)

• Your SiriusXM൅ ID can be displayed
• Reset SiriusXM൅ settings

231

06 Infotainment
Radio
Skip options
This function is used to remove a channel from
the list of available channels.

Skipping a channel
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.
3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip
options menu.
4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip
list.

be skipped the next time the ignition is
switched on.

Channel lock
Access to specific channels can be restricted
(locked). A locked channel will not provide
audio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all
channels in the category or turn TUNE
to scroll to a channel and press OK/
MENU to select it. Multiple channels can
be selected.
The selected channel is now locked and a
checked box will be displayed to indicate this.
It will be necessary to enter the channel access
code2 in order to listen to a locked channel.

All channels are initially unlocked.

Unlocking a channel

5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories
or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and
press OK/MENU to select it.

1. Press OK/MENU.

A channel's access code2 is required to unlock
a channel.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.

Unlock all channels

6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all
channels in the category or turn TUNE
to scroll to a channel and press OK/
MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple
channels can be selected.

3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll
to the Lock options menu and press OK/
MENU.

Locking a channel

Unskip all channels

4. Use the keypad in the central control panel
to enter the channel access code2 and
press OK/MENU.

This removes all channels from the skip list and
makes them available for selection.

5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel
lock list.

Temporary unskip all channels

6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories
or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and
press OK/MENU to select it.

This function will temporarily unskip all channels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the skip list and will again

This permanently removes all channels from
the locked list and makes them available for
selection.

Temporarily unlock all channels
This function will temporarily unlock all channels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the locked list and will
again be locked the next time the ignition is
switched on.

CHANGE CODE
This function makes it possible to change the
channel access code. The default code is
0000.
To change the code:

232

The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

06 Infotainment
Radio
1. Select Change code in the Lock
options menu and press OK/MENU.
2. Enter the new code and press OK/MENU.
3. Confirm the new code and press OK/
MENU.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text
Incorrect code is displayed.
If you have forgotten the access code:
1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced
settings menu and press OK/MENU.
2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for
several seconds.
3. The current code will be displayed.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
assistance.

SiriusXM൅
൅ ID
This function displays the 12-digit SiriusXM൅
activation ID.

233

06 Infotainment
Media player
CD/DVD1 functions

OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selection or access the menus for the currently
selected source (e.g., Disc) or press the
thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad.
Left/right arrow keys: Fast back/forward
and change track or chapter2.
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files:

•
• Home-burned CDs with audio and /or
Purchased CDs (CD Audio)

video files
Center console control panel

Disc slot
MEDIA button, the most recently used
active source will start when MEDIA is
pressed. Pressing this key from Media
mode's main view will display a shortcut
menu.

Eject
Keypad
TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu
selections/folders/tracks (or turn the
thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad).

1
2

234

• Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or
video files

• Purchased DVDs
For a list of compatible formats, see
page 237.
Media menu selections can be made from the
center console or the steering wheel keypad.
For more information about the infotainment
menu system, see page 216.
For general information regarding menu navigation, see page 218 and menu overview see
page 222.

The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system.
DVDs only

Playing a disc
Press MEDIA ans scroll to Disc. Press OK/
MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering
wheel keypad. If there is a disc in the player, it
will begin playing automatically. Otherwise,
Insert disc will be displayed. Insert the disc
into the slot with the text side upward and it will
begin playing automatically.
If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its
folder structure will be read by the system. It
may take several seconds until the disc begins
playing, depending on its quality and the
amount of information it contains.

Disc eject
For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc
must be removed within 12 seconds or it will
be automatically drawn back into the slot.

Pause
When the infotainment system volume is
turned off completely or the sound is muted,
the player will pause. It will resume playing
when the volume is turned up again or if the
sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via
the menu system, select Play/Pause.

06 Infotainment
Media player
Navigating a disc and playing tracks
CD audio discs
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to
navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to confirm a choice and begin listening. Press EXIT
to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return to the
playlist's root level.
/
buttons on the center console or
The
steering wheel keypad can also be used to
change tracks.

Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to
navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to confirm a choice and begin listening. Use EXIT to
stop or to go back in the disc's folder structure.
Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist's
root level.
/
buttons on the center console or
The
steering wheel keypad* can also be used to
change audio/video files.

When a file has been played, the player will
continue to play the rest of the files (of the same
type) in the current folder. When all of the files
in the folder have been played, the player will
automatically go to the next folder and play the
files in it (unless Repeat folder is activated).
The system automatically detects and changes
settings if a disc containing only audio or only
video files is inserted in the player and will play
these files. However, the system will not
change settings if a disc containing both audio
and video files is inserted and the player will
continue to play the current type of file.

- audio files
- video files
- folders

For information, see page 234.

Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the
/
buttons to fast
forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for
audio files but several speeds can be chosen
for video files. Press the
/
buttons several times to increase the speed. Release the
button to return to normal viewing speed.

Scan3
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each track/audio file. To start scanning:
1. Press OK/MENU.

NOTE
Video images will only be visible when the
vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is
traveling faster than approximately 4 mph
(6 km/h), No visual media available while
driving will be displayed. Sound from the
film will still be audible and video images will
be shown again when the vehicle stops.

2. Scroll to Scan.
> The first ten seconds of each track/
audio file will be played.
3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The current track/audio file will continue playing.

Random3

The following symbols are used in the display:

•
•
•

DVD videos

NOTE
Some copy protected audio files or homeburned audio files may not be read by the
player.

This function plays the tracks in random order
(shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be
scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to
tracks in random order:
1. Press OK/MENU,

Not video DVDs

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

235

06 Infotainment
Media player
2. Scroll to Random
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the random play function.
Press the
/
buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad to change
tracks/audio files.

Repeat folder4
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been
played, the first file will begin again. To activate:

Navigating in a DVD's menus

1. Press OK/MENU.

In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a selection and press OK/MENU to confirm. This also
returns you to the list of chapters. Press EXIT
to cancel and return to the normal view (without
having made a selection).
It is also possible to change chapters by pressing
/
on the center console control
panel or on the steering wheel keypad.

Advanced settings

2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder.

Angle

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.

If the DVD supports this function, it is possible
to select a camera angle for a certain scene.

Playing video DVDs

This can be done in DVD mode under DVD disc
menu Advanced settings Angle.

Play

DivX Video On Demand

When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may
appear on the display, giving you access to
extra functions and settings such as choice of
subtitle and language, scene selection, etc.

Buttons in the center console control panel,
shown above, are used to navigate in a DVD's
menus.

Changing chapters or title
TurnTUNE to access the list of chapters and
navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is

236

currently playing). Press OK/MENU to choose
a chapter and return to the normal view in the
display (if a film was playing, it will resume).
Press EXIT to access the list of titles.

Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

The media player can be registered to play
DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or
USB. The registration code can be found by
pressing the MY CAR button, and going to
Settings Information DivX® VOD
code. See page 191 for more information
about the menu system.

06 Infotainment
Media player
See also www.divx.com/vod for more information.

NOTE

Screen settings can be made (when the vehicle
is not moving) for:

Dual format (double-sided discs) such as
DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than normal discs and may not play in your infotainment system.

• Brightness
• Contrast

If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3
tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be
ignored.

1. Press OK/MENU and choose Image
settings and confirm by pressing OK/
MENU.

Audio
formats

Screen settings

2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and
press OK/MENU.

Video formats

CD-Audio, mp3, wma,
aac, m4a
CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx,
avi, asf

3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm the change by pressing OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the
screen settings list.

To return to the factory settings, select Reset .

Compatible formats
The media player can play a number of different types of files and disc formats, and is compatible with the formats listed in the following
table.

237

06 Infotainment
AUX/USB sockets
Connecting external devices

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to select the
desired source (iPod, USB or AUX). Press
OK/MENU.
> For example, if a USB device has been
selected, the text Connect USB will be
displayed.
2. Connect the device to one of the sockets
in the center console storage compartment
(see the illustration).

Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage compartment between the front seats

An auxiliary device, such as an iPod or MP3
player can be connected to the infotainment
system via one of the sockets in the center
console storage compartment. A device connected to the USB socket can be operated
using the vehicle's infotainment system controls.
An iPod or an MP3 player with rechargeable
batteries will also be charged if the device is
connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's
ignition is on or if the engine is running).
To connect a device:

238

USB and iPod only

The text Reading USB will be displayed while
the system reads the device's folders. This may
take a short time, depending on the folder
structure and the number of files.
When this information has been loaded, track
information will be displayed and a track can
be selected.

NOTE

•

The system supports a number of
iPod models produced in 2005 or later.

•

In order to help avoid damage to the
USB socket, it will be switched off if
there is a short circuit or if the connected device uses too much current
(which can happen if the device does
not comply with the USB standard). The
USB socket will reactivate the next time
the ignition is switched on if the problem
no longer exists. If the problem persists,
contact a trained and authorized Volvo
service technician.

Media menu selections can be made from the
center console or the steering wheel keypad,
see page 216 for more information.

Navigating and playing tracks1
Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist and
to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to
either select a sub-folder or confirm a choice
and begin playback. Press EXIT to cancel and
exit the playlist or to go back in the folder structure. Press and hold EXIT to go to the highest
level in the playlist.

06 Infotainment
AUX/USB sockets
The
/
buttons on the center console or
steering wheel keypad can also be used to
change tracks/files.
The following symbols are used in the display:

•
•
•

- audio files
- video files
- folders

When a file has been played, the player will
continue to play the rest of the files (of the same
type) in the current folder. When all of the files
in the folder have been played, the player will
automatically go to the next folder1 (unless
Repeat folder is activated) and play the files
in it.
The system automatically detects and changes
settings if a device containing only audio or
only video files is connected to the USB socket
and will play these files. However, the system
will not change settings if the device contains
both audio and video files and will continue to
play the current type of file.

Fast

forward/reverse1

For information, see page 235.

Scan1
For information, see page 235.
1
2

Random1

External sound sources

For information, see page 235.

USB flash drive

Search1

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
advisable to only store music files on the drive.
It will take considerably longer for the system
to index the files on the drive if it contains anything other than compatible music files.

The keypad in the center console can be used
to search for a file in the currently selected
folder.
Start the search by either turning TUNE (to
access the folders) or by pressing one of the
character keys to enter a letter/number. Possible search results will be displayed as characters are entered.

NOTE

•

The system supports removable media
that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the
FAT32 file system. It can index up to
1,000 folders and a maximum of 254
sub-folders/files for each folder. However, the highest folder level can support up to 1,000 sub-folders/files.

•

When using a longer type of USB
device, connecting it with a USB
adapter cable will help reduce mechanical wear on the USB socket and on the
device.

Play the file by pressing OK/MENU.

Repeat2
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been
played, the first file will begin again. For information, see page 236.

USB hub
A USB hub can be connected to the USB
socket, making it possible to connect several
USB devices at the same time. To select one
of the devices, go to the menu USB menu
Select USB device

USB and iPod only
USB only

239

06 Infotainment
AUX/USB sockets
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have a file indexing system
that is not supported by the vehicle's infotainment system. In order to use an MP3 player,
the system must be set to USB Removable
device/Mass Storage Device.

iPod
An iPod receives current and its battery is
charged through the USB cable.
The system will only play audio files from an
iPod.

NOTE
When an iPod is used as a sound source,
the vehicle's infotainment system has a
menu structure similar to the one in the
iPod. See the iPod's manual for detailed
information.
06

Compatible file formats via the USB
socket
The following audio and video files are supported by the system when playing a device connected to the USB socket.

240

Audio formats

mp3, wma, aac,
m4a

Video formats

divx, avi, asf

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth media
Introduction
The vehicle's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can play streaming audio files
from a Bluetooth device such as a cell phone
or mp3 player. Navigation and control of the
device can be done through the vehicle's center console control panel or the steering wheel
keypad. On certain external devices, it is also
possible to change tracks from the device.

The vehicle's media player can only play audio
files through the Bluetooth function.

Overview

Not all cell phones are fully compatible with
the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list of
compatible phones is available at you Volvo
retailer or at www.volvocars.us.

Menu navigation
Choices can be made in the Bluetooth menus
from the center console control panel or the
steering wheel keypad. For additional information about navigating the various menus, see
page 216.

Left/right arrow keys: Short press: change
tracks. Long press: fast forward/reverse
within a track. The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad can be used in the same
way.

Pairing and connecting an external
device

NOTE
Any Bluetooth cell phones used must support Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The phone must use AVRCP
version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older versions
of these standards are used, certain features (e.g., scan or random) may not function.

EXIT: Press to go back in the menu structure or cancel a function.

Center console control panel

VOL: Volume control
MEDIA button, the most recently used
active source will start when MEDIA is
pressed. Pressing this key from Media
mode's main view will display a shortcut
menu.
TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu alternatives and folders shown in the display.
OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selection or access the menus.

Before an external device can be connected, it
must be paired to the infotainment system. The
procedure for connecting an external device
varies, depending whether or not the device
has previously been paired to the infotainment
system. A maximum of 10 external devices can
be paired and each device only needs to be
paired once. To pair a device, see page 244.
06

Automatic connection
When the Bluetooth function is active and the
most recently used device is within range, it is
automatically connected. When the infotainment system searches for the most recently
used device, its name is shown in the display.
To connect another paired device, press EXIT.
See the following section for information about
switching to another device.

241

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth media
Switching to another device

Disconnecting an external device

It is possible to switch among paired
Bluetooth devices that are in the vehicle. To
do so:

The external device is automatically disconnected from the infotainment system if it is
moved out of range.

1. Press MEDIA,scroll to Bluetooth and
press the thumb wheel on the steering
wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

Removing a paired device

2. Be sure the Bluetooth device is discoverable (refer to its user manual if necessary).

2. Scroll to Remove Bluetooth device and
press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

3. Scroll to the device to be removed by turning the thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm
by pressing the thumb wheel or OK/
MENU.
> A question asking if you would like to
remove the device will be displayed.

4. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to Change
device and confirm by pressing the thumb
wheel or OK/MENU.
> After several seconds, the names of any
paired external devices will be displayed.
06

5. Scroll to the device to be connected and
press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
> The device will be connected.
Audio files can now be selected using the
/
buttons in the center console or on
the steering wheel keypad.

242

Function is not supported on all cell phones.

This function plays the first ten seconds of
each audio file. This function can be activated/
deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Scan.
Scanning can be canceled by pressing EXIT.

1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU.

4. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU to
confirm or EXIT to cancel.

Random1
This function plays the audio files on the external device in random order (shuffle). This function can be activated/deactivated under:
Bluetooth menu Random
/
buttons on the center conPress the
sole or steering wheel keypad to change
tracks.

Scanning audio files on an external
device1

Bluetooth version information
This feature offers information about the
Bluetooth version installed in the vehicle's
infotainment system. This information can be
found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth
software version in car.

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Introduction

Compliance

Canada: IC 700BIAM2101

This feature makes it possible to set up a wireless connection between a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone or other device and the vehicle’s infotainment system. This enables the
infotainment system to function as a handsfree connection and allows you to remote-control a number of the phone’s functions. The
microphone used by this system is located
near the driver's side sun visor (2). The buttons
and other controls on the cell phone can
always be used regardless of whether or not
the phone is connected to the hands-free system.

FCC/IC common sentence

Menu navigation

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules
and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of
this device.

TEL menu selections can be made from the
center console or the steering wheel keypad.
For additional information about navigating the
various menus, see page 216.

NOTE
Not all cell phones are fully compatible with
the hands-free system. A list of compatible
phones is available at your Volvo retailer or
at www.volvocars.us

WARNING
Never use the hands-free feature or any
other device in your vehicle in a way that
distracts you from the task of driving safely.
Distraction can lead to a serious accident.

USA: FCC ID A269ZUA130
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.

IC RSS-Gen
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very
low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it
should be installed and operated with at least
8 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator
and person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

System overview

Cell phone

Location of the microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Center console control panel and display

243

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Bluetooth® functions in the center
console control panel

Control panel in the center console.

Keypad containing letters and numbers for
dialing numbers, adding phone book
entries, etc.
TEL: Press this button to activate/deactivate the Bluetooth function. If TEL is
already active, pressing this button again
will display a shortcut menu with commonly used functions.

TUNE: From TEL mode's normal view, turn
clockwise to display the phone book or
counterclockwise for the phone list. It can
also be used for navigating in displayed
menus. The thumb wheel in the steering
1

244

wheel keypad can be used in the same
way.

Pairing (connecting) external
Bluetooth® devices

OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming
call, confirm your selection or access the
phone menus. Incoming calls can also be
answered by pressing the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad.

A maximum of 10 cell phones or other devices
can be paired with the hands-free system. Pairing only needs to be done once for each phone.
After pairing, the cell phone no longer needs to
be in sight or discoverable.

EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase
characters that have been entered, end an
ongoing function and goes back in the
menus. This button on the steering wheel
keypad can also be used in the same way.

Two Bluetooth® devices (e.g., a phone and an
iPod®) can be active at the same. However, two
phones cannot be used at the same time to
make calls.

Getting started
Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad
and in the center console to access, navigate
and make selections in the hands-free system’s menus.

Activation
A short press on the TEL button in the center
console activates the Bluetooth® hands-free
system. If the system is already activated when
the button is pressed, a shortcut menu will be
displayed. The
symbol at the upper right
of the display indicates that the hands-free
system is active.

There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to
the hands-free system for the first time:
Method 1: Search for the external device using
the infotainment menus
1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth function to make it discoverable (refer to the
phone’s user manual if necessary) or go to
www.volvocars.com
2. Press TEL.
> The infotainment system will search for
previously paired devices.
3. Press the thumb wheel on the steering
wheel keypad or OK/MENU and select
Add phone.1

Select Change phone if the cell phone or device has already been paired with the infotainment system. If several phones or devices have already been paired, their names will also be displayed.
Scroll to the device to be connected and press the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode,
press OK/MENU.
> The infotainment system will search for
cell phones or devices that are in range,
which takes approximately 30 seconds.
Any phones detected will be displayed
using their Bluetooth names. The
hands-free system’s Bluetooth name
will appear in the cell phone’s display as
My Volvo Car.
5. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to select
one of the cell phones shown in the center
console display and press the thumb wheel
or OK/MENU.
6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the
digits (PIN code) shown in the center console display and press the button on the
cell phone used to confirm a choice.
The external device is now paired and can be
controlled from the infotainment system.
If the connection failed: Press EXIT and connect with method 2 below.
Method 2: Search for the vehicle using the
external device’s Bluetooth function.
1. Press TEL. If a phone or external device is
already connected, disconnect it.
> The Bluetooth function will search for
previously paired devices.

2. Make the vehicle discoverable by pressing
the thumb wheel or OK/MENU and selecting Phone settings Discoverable.
3. Search for the vehicle using the phone or
external device's Bluetooth function.
Refer to its user manual if necessary.
4. Select My Volvo Car on the phone or
external device’s screen and follow the
directions provided.
5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the
external device and press its button to pair
the device. When prompted, enter the
same PIN code in the vehicle using the
center console keypad.
6. Pair My Volvo Car from the external
device.
When the external device has been paired, its
Bluetooth name appear in the center console
display. This device can now be controlled
from the infotainment system.

Connect automatically
When the hands-free system is active and the
most recently connected cell phone is within
range, it will be connected automatically. If this
phone is not within range, the hands-free system will attempt to connect one of the other
paired cell phones. When the infotainment system searches for the most recently connected
phone, its name appears in the display.

Connect manually
To connect a phone other than the one that
was most recently connected or to switch
between cell phones that are already paired
with the hands-free system, go to Phone
menu Change phone.

Changing phones or devices
More than one device can be used in the vehicle as long as this device has been paired. To
do so, see page 244.
Changing devices:
1. Check that the external device is discoverable.
2. Press TEL and select Change phone.
> The infotainment system will search for
previously paired devices. Those that
are detected will be displayed on the
screen.

3. Select the desired device by turning the
thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm by
pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
> The device will be connected.

Making a call
1. Ensure that
is shown at the top of the
center console display and that the handsfree function is in telephone mode.

245

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
2. Dial the desired phone number using the
center console keypad or use the speed
dial function (see page 250). In normal
view (see page see page 215 for information about the various display views), it is
also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to
access the phone book and then counterclockwise for the call list. See page 250 for
more information about the phone book.
3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
End or reject a call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone
The cell phone is automatically disconnected
from the infotainment system if it is moved out
of range.

The cell phone can be manually disconnected
from the hands-free system by pressing and
holding TEL or in phone mode, going to Phone
menu Disconnect phone. See also page
247 for more information about connections.
The hands-free system is also deactivated
when the ignition is switched off (or if the
driver’s door is opened).
When the cell phone is disconnected from the
hands-free system, a call in progress can be
continued using the cell phone’s own speaker
and microphone.

Even if the cell phone has been disconnected
manually, some phones may reconnect automatically, for example when a new call is initiated.

Call settings

Removing a paired device

• Mute: mute the infotainment system’s

A paired phone or device can be removed from
the list. To do so:

• Mobile phone: transfer the call from

While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU or
the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad
to access the following functions:
microphone.
hands-free to the cell phone. On certain
cell phones, the connection will be broken,
which is normal. The hands-free function
will ask if you would like to reconnect.

1. Press TEL.
2. Select Phone menu
Bluetooth device.

Remove

• Dial number: dial a third party during an
ongoing call using the keypad (the current
call will be put on hold).

Handling calls
Incoming calls
–

Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad) to answer a
call, even if the infotainment system is currently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or
MEDIA).

Press EXIT to reject a call.

Auto answer
This function means that incoming calls will be
answered automatically. Activate or deactivate
the function in the menu system under Phone
menu Call options Auto answer.

Call lists
Call lists are copied to the hands-free function
each time a cell phone is connected and the
lists are updated while the phone is connected.
In normal view, turn TUNE counter-clockwise
to see the All calls list.
In phone mode, the various call lists can be
displayed in Phone menu Call lists:

•
•
•
•

All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls (certain cell phones show
this list in reverse order)

• Call duration

246

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
If no number has been stored, this menu can
be accessed by pressing and holding 1.

Voice mail
In normal view, a speed dial number for voice
mail can be programmed and accessed by
pressing and holding 1.
The number for voice mail can be changed in
phone mode in Phone menu Call options
Voicemail number Change number.

Ringing volume

Phone book

In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
volume and adjust the volume by turning
VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT.

The hands-free system uses two phone books
(one with the cell phone's list of contacts and
one with contacts saved directly in the infotainment system), which are combined to form
one phone book.

Ringing tones

• The infotainment system downloads the

The hands-free system’s integrated ringing
tones can be selected in Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc.

• The infotainment system also has an inte-

Sound settings
Call volume
Call volume can be only be adjusted during a
call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel keypad or the infotainment system’s VOL control.

Infotainment system volume
If no phone call is in progress, volume for the
infotainment system can be adjusted in the
normal way with the infotainment system's
VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad.

phone book from a connected cell phone.
This phone book will only be displayed
when this cell phone is connected to the
hands-free system.

NOTE
The connected cell phone’s ring tone may
not be switched off when one of the handsfree system's ringing tones is used.

If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s
ring tone2, go to Phone menu Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
signals Mobile phone ring signal.

grated phone book made up of contacts
that have been saved in the system,
regardless of which cell phone is currently
connected when the contact is saved.
These contacts will be displayed regardless of the cell phone that is connected. If
a contact has been saved in the infotainsymbol will be disment system, the
played next to it.

Infotainment system sound can be automatically muted when a phone call is received in
Phone menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Mute radio/media.

Not supported by all cell phones.

247

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
NOTE
Changes made from the infotainment system to a contact in the cell phone's phone
book will result in a new contact being
added to the infotainment system's phone
book. However, this contact will not be
saved in the cell phone's phone book. The
infotainment system's display will show
duplicate contacts with different icons.
Please also note that if a speed dial number
is saved or if a contact's information is edited, this will result in a new contact in the
infotainment system's phone book.

The
symbol must be displayed before
the phone book can be used and the handsfree function must be in phone mode.

The infotainment system saves a copy of each
paired cell phone's phone book. This phone
book can be copied each time the phone is
connected.
–

Activate/deactivate this function in phone
mode in Phone menu Phone settings
Download phone book.

If the phone book contains information about
someone who is trying to call you, this information will be shown in the display.

Contact shortcuts
A quick way of searching the phone book for
contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE clockwise to access the phone book and then counter-clockwise to select a contact from the list.
Press OK/MENU to call.
Each name in the phone book has a default
symbol is displayed to
phone number. If the
the right of it, this indicates that there are additional phone numbers for this contact. To use
a phone number other than the default one,
press the
button on the center console
control panel. Turn TUNE to select a different
phone number and press OK/MENU to call.
It is also possible to search for a contact by
using the center console keypad to enter the
first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also the
following table "Buttons in the center console"
for each button's function).
The list of contacts can also be accessed from
normal view by pressing and holding the button
on the center console keypad with the first letter of the contact's name. For example, pressing and holding button 6 would provide direct
access to the section of the list with contacts
whose names begin with M.

Buttons in the center console

Button

Function
Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2
DEFÈÉ3
GHIÌ4
JKL5
MNOÖØÑÒ6
PQRSß7
TUVÜÙ8
WXYZ9
Shift between upper and lower
case
+0pw
#*

248

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Searching for contacts

3. To switch from letter entry mode to the
entry mode for numbers or special characters, or to go to the phone book, turn
TUNE to one of the selections (see the
explanation in the following table) in the list
for switching character entry mode (2) and
press OK/MENU.

Adding a new contact

Character entry modes

Searching for contacts using the text wheel

List of characters
Switch between character entry modes
(see the following table)
Phone book (list of contacts)

123/
ABC

Toggle between letters and numbers by pressing OK/MENU.

Switch to special characters by
pressing OK/MENU.
This leads to the phone book (3).
Turn TUNE to select a contact
and press OK/MENU to display
the contact's information.

To search for or edit a contact in phone mode,
go to Phone menu Phone book
Search.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character.
Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that have been entered.

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter
keys on the center console can also be
used.

If a number button on the center console is
pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a list
of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly press
the button once to enter its first letter, twice to
enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press
the button to display other characters. Continue with the next character, etc.

2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results
of the search will be displayed in the phone
book (3).

Enter the name of a new contact

Switch between character entry modes
(see the following table)
Character entry field
New contacts can be added in phone mode in
Phone menu Phone book New
contact.

1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/
MENU to go to the character entry mode
(see the illustration).
2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter
keys on the center console can also be
used.

To enter a number, press and hold the button.
``

249

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name
entered will be displayed in the character
entry field (2).

Toggle between upper and lower
case letters by pressing OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU and the cursor
will move to the character entry
field (2) at the top of the display.
The cursor can now be moved by
turning TUNE to a position where
new characters can be entered
or deleted by pressing EXIT. In
order to add characters, return to
text entry mode by pressing OK/
MENU.

When you have finished entering the name,
select OK in the list in the display (1) and press
OK/MENU. Continue by entering the phone
number in the same way.

250

When you have entered the phone number,
press OK/MENU and select a tag for the number (Mobile phone, Home, Work or General).
Press OK/MENU to confirm.

Speed dial

When all of the contact's information has been
entered, select Save contact in the menu to
save.

To use speed dial to make a call in phone
mode, press a button on the center console
keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact
has not been saved on the speed dial number
used, you will be prompted to save a contact
on the number selected.

123/
ABC

Toggle between letters and numbers by pressing OK/MENU.

Switch to special characters by
pressing OK/MENU.

Save and return to Add contact
by pressing OK/MENU.

Phone book

Memory status

4. To switch from letter entry mode to the
entry mode for numbers or special characters, or to toggle between upper and lower
case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the
selections (see the explanation in the following table) in the list (1) and press OK/
MENU.

is activated in Phone menu
Receive vCard.

Speed dial numbers can be added in phone
mode in Phone menu Phone book
Speed dial.

Accept vCards
vCards from other cell phones can be added to
the infotainment system's phone book. To enable this feature, put the infotainment system in
discoverable mode for Bluetooth. The feature

In phone mode, the memory status of the infotainment system's phone book and the connected cell phone's phone book can be seen
in Phone menu Phone book Memory
status.

Clearing the phone book
In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment
system's phone book can be cleared in Phone
menu Phone book Clear phone book.

NOTE
Clearing the entries in the infotainment system's phone book does not delete entries in
the cell phone's phone book.

Bluetooth version information
For information about the Bluetooth version
installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.

06 Infotainment
Cell phone voice control
Introduction
The infotainment system's voice control feature1 enables the driver to voice-activate certain functions in a Bluetooth-connected cell
phone or the navigation system.

NOTE

•

The information in this section applies
to using voice commands to operate a
Bluetooth-connected cell phone.
See also the section "Bluetooth
hands-free connection" beginning on
page 243 for detailed information about
using a cell phone with the vehicle's
infotainment system.
The navigation system has a separate
user's guide containing information
about voice commands for operating
that system.

WARNING

Languages

As the driver, you have full responsibility for
operating the vehicle safely and adhering to
all applicable traffic regulations.

The voice control feature provides access to a
number of functions in the Bluetooth handsfree and navigation systems while allowing you
to keep your hands on the steering wheel. Input
is in dialogue form using spoken commands
from the user and verbal prompts from the system. Voice control uses the same microphone
as the Bluetooth hands-free system (see the
illustration on page 243) and system prompts
are provided through the infotainment system's front speakers.

List of languages.

Voice control is not available for all languages.
The available languages are indicated by the
icon. The language can be changed in the
MY CAR menu system under MY CAR
Settings System options Language.

Voice commands offer convenience and help
avoid distractions so that you can concentrate
on driving and focus your attention on road and
traffic conditions.

Available in vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System only

251

06 Infotainment
Cell phone voice control
Getting started

• When giving commands, speak at your
usual speed and in a normal tone of voice
after the tone

• The vehicle's doors, windows and moonroof should be closed when using the voice
control system

• Avoid background noises in the cabin
when using the system

NOTE

Voice control button (1) on the steering wheel.

Activating the system

Before any phone voice commands can be
used, a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must
be paired with the infotainment system. If a
phone command is given, the system will
inform you If there is no cell phone paired. See
page 244 for information on pairing a cell
phone.
Press the voice control button (1 in the illustration) to activate the system and initiate a command dialogue. The system will display commonly used commands on the screen when the
button has been pressed.
While using the voice control system, keep the
following points in mind:

252

If you are uncertain of the commands that
you can use, saying "help" will prompt the
system to provide a number of commands
that can be used in a specific situation.
Voice control commands can be cancelled
by:

•
•
•
•

Saying "cancel"
Not speaking
Pressing and holding the voice control
button
Pressing EXIT or one of the mode buttons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).

Voice control support feature

• Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint you
with the system and the procedure for giving commands.

This feature can be accessed by pressing the
MY CAR button in the center console and turning TUNE.

Tutorial
The tutorial feature can be started in two ways:

NOTE
The tutorial feature can only be started when
the vehicle is parked and the parking brake
is applied.

• By pressing the voice control button and
saying "Voice tutorial."

• By pressing MY CAR and going to
Settings Voice settings Voice
tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the
tutorial lesson.
The tutorial is divided into three lessons, which
take a total of approximately 5 minutes to complete.
By default, the system will begin with the first
lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the
voice control button and say "next." Go back
to a previous lesson by saying "previous."
Press and hold the voice control button to exit
the tutorial.

06 Infotainment
Cell phone voice control
Voice output volume
Press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice
settings Voice output volume. Press OK/
MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the
volume. Press EXIT to save the change and
exit the menu.

Using voice commands
The driver initiates a voice command dialogue
by pressing the voice control button (see the
illustration on page 252).
When a dialogue has been initiated, commonly
used commands will be shown in the display.
Grayed-out texts or texts in parentheses are
not part of the spoken command.
Once you become familiar with the system, you
can speed up the command dialogue by briefly
pressing the voice control button to skip
prompts from the system.
Commands can be given in several ways.
For example, the command "Phone call contact" can be spoken as:

• "Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone," wait
for a system response, and then continue
by saying "Call contact."

• "Phone call contact"—give the entire command at one time

The following is a list of features that can be
voice-controlled with a Bluetooth-connected
cell phone.

Shortcuts
Shortcut commands for using the phone can
be found in the MY CAR menu system, under
Settings Voice settings Voice
command list Phone commands and
General commands. See page 191 for more
information on the menu system.

User action
Begin saying the digits in the phone number. If
you say several digits and pause, the system
will repeat them and prompt you by saying
"Continue."
Continue saying the digits. When you have finished, complete the command by saying
"Dial."

• You can also change the number by using
the commands "Correction" (which deletes the last group of digits spoken) or
"Delete" (which will erase the entire phone
number).

Dialing a number
The system understands the digits zero to nine.
These numbers can be spoken individually, in
groups of several digits at a time, or the entire
number can be given at once. Numbers above
nine will not be recognized.
The following is an example of a voice command dialogue. The system's response may
vary depending on the situation.

Dialing from a call list
The dialogue below enables you make a call
from one of your cell phone's call lists.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:
Phone > dial from call list

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone dial from call list

Phone > dial number

Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.

or
Phone dial number

Calling a contact

System response

The dialogue below enables you to call the predefined contacts in your cell phone. See the
phone's user's guide if necessary.

Number please

253

06 Infotainment
Cell phone voice control
The user initiates the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call contact
or
Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
When calling contacts, keep the following in
mind:

• If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the display in numbered lines and the system will
prompt you to pick a line number

• If there are more lines in the list than can
be displayed at one time, saying "Down"
will enable you to scroll downward in the
list (and saying "up" will take you back up
through the list).
06

Dialing voice mail
The dialogue below enables you to call your
voice mail to check any messages that you
may have received. Your voice mail phone
number must be registered in the Bluetooth
function, see page 247.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:
Phone > dial voice mail
or
Phone dial voice mail

254

Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
Overview

Screen: channel A (left), channel B (right)

Introduction

Headphone socket

The RSE system1 provides entertainment for
the rear seat passengers by making it possible
to e.g., watch a film, play music, listen to the
radio or connect an external device such as a
game console.

On/Off button
A/V-AUX socket
Remote control
Headphones
IR transceiver

RSE is fully integrated into the vehicle's infotainment system and can be used at the same
time as other infotainment features.
For example, if a rear seat passenger is using
A/V-AUX and headphones, the driver and front
seat passenger can still use the vehicle's radio

or media player. However, only one disc can be
played in the media player at a time. You can
listen to music from e.g., an iPod or from
streaming audio files using the Bluetooth
function.

The RSE system can be controlled from the
front screen (parental control).
Different media can be played or viewed from
different sources on the various screens (front
center console and/or the respective screens
in the rear seat). It is also possible to play or
view media from the same source on one or

This system may not be available as an option on all markets.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

255

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
more of the screens. However, it is not possible
to play a film from USB while a CD or DVD is
being played.

CAUTION
When transporting large objects in the rear
seat, be sure that there is adequate space
between the object(s) and the RSE screens
to help avoid scratching or damaging these
screens.
If necessary, cover the screens with a suitable material.

NOTE

•

The RSE screens and remote control
may not function in very low or very high
cabin temperatures. They will become
operable again after the climate control
system has created a comfortable temperature in the cabin.
Keep the IR transceivers' lenses clean
by wiping them regularly with a damp
cloth. A dirty lens could affect the function of the remote control.

Ignition modes and electrical current to
RSE
RSE can be activated with the ignition in
modes I or II (and when the engine is running).

256

See page 84 for detailed information about the
various ignition modes. If a film is being played,
it will stop momentarily while the engine is
being started and will resume when the engine
is running.

Cordless headphones

NOTE
Using RSE for more than approx.
10 minutes when the engine is not running
will drain the vehicle's battery and may
make the engine difficult or impossible to
start.
A message will be displayed on the screen
if the battery's charge level becomes too
low.

Using the system's menus
Selections in the RSE menus are made using
the remote control. See page 261 for more
information about the RSE menus.

Remote control
A remote control is included with the RSE system, which can be used to control both screens
in the rear seat as well as other infotainment
system functions.
See page 264 for more detailed information
about the remote control.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Switch for selecting channel A (CH.A) or
channel B (CH.B)
On/Off button
Volume
On/Off indicator light
Two sets of cordless headphones are included
with the RSE system.
The cordless headphones are activated using
the On/Off button (2). The indicator light (4) will
illuminate when the headphones are on. Select
CH.A (channel A) or CH.B (channel B) with
switch (1). Use control (3) to adjust the volume.

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
NOTE
The headphones will switch off automatically after approx. 3 minutes if they are not
used.

Disposing of old batteries
Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner.

Connecting a device to the A/V-AUX
socket

Headphone socket
Replacing batteries in the headphones
The headphones use two AAA batteries.
It is advisable to have extra batteries on hand
during long trips.

External headphones can be connected to the
3.5 mm headphone socket on the side of the
head restraint (see the illustration on page
255 for the location of this socket). Adjust the
volume with the remote control.

A/V-AUX socket, 12-volt socket
This A/V-AUX socket is used to connect external devices to the RSE system. When connecting an external device, always follow the
instructions provided with the device. Devices
connected through the A/V-AUX socket can
use the screens, cordless headphones, the
3.5 mm headphone socket and the infotainment system's speakers.
Battery cover and retaining screw

1. Unscrew the retaining screw and remove
the battery cover.
2. Remove the old batteries and insert new
ones in the directions indicated by the
symbols in the battery holder.

CAUTION
Please be aware that external devices connected through the A/V-AUX socket may
cause interference in the RSE system.

The A/V-AUX socket is located under the center
armrest in the tunnel console

1. Connect the device's video cable to the
yellow connector.
2. Connect the left audio cable to the white
connector and the right audio cable to the
red one.

3. If the device is designed to use 12-volt current, connect its power cable to the 12-volt
socket (see page 210 for the location of this
socket).
Always follow the device's instructions when
connecting it to the RSE system.

3. Put the cover back in place and tighten the
retaining screw.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

257

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
Audio/video playback through the A/VAUX socket
1. Switch on one of the rear screens by pressing its On/Off button.
2. Use the remote control's
button to
select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front
screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the
remote control toward the selected
screen's IR transceiver and press the
button several times to come to A/V
AUX . Release the button and wait several
seconds to confirm your choice.

tinue by pressing the
or
button on
the remote control to select a source such as
Disc, etc.

Settings made from the front center
control panel

1. Press MEDIA several times to come to
RSE on the front screen. Wait several seconds for your selection to be confirmed.
2. Turn TUNE to select one or both of the rear
screens and confirm by pressing OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to select RADIO, MEDIA (or
RSE settings). Press OK/MENU to confirm.
4. Turn TUNE to the desired source (for
example, Disc) and confirm by pressing
OK/MENU. The selected source will begin
playing automatically (if there is a disc in
the media player).

3. Switch on the connected device and press
PLAY (or the device's equivalent button).

Input volume

Cancel and return by pressing EXIT.

Adjust the input volume in the RSE menu,
under A/V AUX input volume.

Activating RSE

TUNE

Settings can also be made with the remote
control. See page 264 for more detailed information.

The RSE system can be activated using controls on the front or rear screens.

OK/MENU

Muting

MEDIA

From the front seat, press MEDIA (see the following illustration) and select RSE.
From the rear seat, press the screen's On/Off
button
button. Use the remote control's
to select a screen (L: left rear screen or R: right
rear screen). Point the remote control toward
the selected screen's IR transceiver and con-

258

both rear screens or different sources can be
selected for the respective screens.

EXIT

Selecting a source for the rear screens
from the front center control panel
An audio/video source for the rear screen(s)
can be selected from the front center control
panel. The same source can be selected for

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Audio for the rear screens can be muted from
the front center control panel. This function can
be activated under RSE settings Mute as
explained in points 2-4 in the section "Selecting a source for the rear screens from the front
center control panel."

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
Switching off the rear screens

Rear screen settings2

Both of rear screens can be switched off from
the front center control panel. This function can
be activated under RSE settings Display
off as explained in points 2-4 in the section
"Selecting a source for the rear screens from
the front center control panel" on page 258.

When watching a video file, a pop-up menu can
on the remote
be displayed by pressing
control. The content of this menu will vary,
depending on the what is being played/viewed.

Press one of the remote control's number keys
(0 - 9) to switch the screens on again. The
screens will also be switched on when the ignition is switched on.

Disabling the remote control (front)
The IR transceiver for the front screen can be
switched off, which means that the remote
control cannot be used on the front screen.
This function can be activated under RSE
settings Disable remote control (front) as
explained in points 2-4 in the section "Selecting a source for the rear screens from the front
center control panel" on page 258.

Day/Night mode
The screens can be set for three different lighting conditions: Auto, Day or Night.
Press
on the remote control and change
the setting under Day/Night mode on the
screen. See also page 261 for additional information about the RSE menus.

Image settings
Screen settings can be made for brightness,
contrast, tint and color.
on the remote control and change
Press
the setting under Image settings on the
screen. See also page 261 for additional information about the RSE menus.

Screen aspect ratio

Zoom 1: Full-screen image, but parts of the
image will not be viewable.
Zoom 2: Full-screen image, but the aspect
ratio will be slightly distorted.
Unless otherwise indicated, the aspect ratio
will be Normal.
Press
on the remote control and change
the setting under Aspect ratio on the screen.
See also page 261 for additional information
about the RSE menus.

Source menu
The content of each source's pop-up menu will
vary, depending on what is being played/
viewed, for example: CD/DVD data menu or
USB menu. See also page 261 for additional
information about the RSE menus.

DVD menu3

If a DVD video is being viewed, this selection
will appear in the pop-up menu. See also page
261 for additional information about the RSE
menus.

Three screen aspect ratios can be set: Normal,
Zoom 1 and Zoom 2.

Normal: The image on the screen is presented
at the normal aspect ratio (usually 4:3 or 16:9).

2
3

Applies only when watching video files.
Applies only to video DVDs.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

259

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
Rear screen menu settings

Music, video and radio

See also page 261 for additional information
about the RSE menus.

Listening to music

Random4
See page 235 for additional information.

Repeat folder5
See page 236 for additional information.

DivX Video On Demand
The media player can be registered to play
DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or
USB. The registration code can be found by
pressing the MY CAR button, and going to
Settings Information DivX® VOD
code. Go to www.divx.com/vod for additional
information.

USB hub
06

A USB hub can be connected to the USB
socket (see page 239 for additional information).

4
5

260

Music from disc tracks/audio files can be
played through the media player's USB/AUX
sockets or from streaming audio files coming
from a Bluetooth-connected cell phone.
For more information about the media player,
see page 236, see page 238 for information
about the AUX/USB sockets and see page
241 for information about Bluetooth media.
1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select
CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the
right screen.

Playback and navigating in playlists
Navigate using the remote control's scroll
wheel (see the illustration on page 264) to
select the desired playlist or folder structure.
to confirm the choice of a sub-folder
Use
or to begin playing the selected track/audio file.
Tracks/audio files can also be played by pressing
on the remote control and change
tracks/audio files by pressing
/
.
Stop playback by pressing
.
See page 236 for more information about the
media player.

Watching a video

2. Use the remote control's
button to
select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front
screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the
remote control toward a screen's IR transone or more times
ceiver and press
to come to the desired source (Disc, USB,
AUX, etc.), release the button and wait
several seconds for your selection to be
accepted.

Video tracks/files can be viewed via the vehicle's media player or the USB socket.

3. Insert a CD in the infotainment system's
media player, or connect an external
device to the vehicle's USB/AUX sockets
or via Bluetooth.

Applies to CD audio, CDs/DVDs, USB and iPod.
Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

For more information about the media player,
see page 236 or page 238 for information about
the USB socket.
1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select
CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the
right screen.

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
to select the desired source (Disc or USB),
release the button and wait several seconds for your selection to be accepted.
3. Insert a DVD in the infotainment system's
media player, or connect an external
device to the vehicle's USB socket.

Playback and navigation
Play a video track/video file by pressing
on the remote control and change tracks/video
files by pressing
/
. Stop playback
by pressing
. See page 235 for more
information about playback and navigation on
video DVDs and page 236 for information
about playing video files.

Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the
/
buttons to fast
forward/reverse. Fast forward/reverse can be
done at several speeds for video files by briefly
pressing these buttons to increase the speed.
Fast forward/reverse is done at one speed for
audio files. Stop fast forward/reverse by press,
or the
/
buttons.
ing

Listening to the radio
You can also listen to the infotainment system's radio through the RSE system.

1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select
CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the
right screen.
2. Point the remote control toward a screen's
IR transceiver and press
one or more
times to come to the desired source (AM,
FM1, SAT1*, etc.), release the button and
wait several seconds for your selection to
be accepted.
3. Select a station using one of the preset
buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control or
/
to search for the next/
press
previous available station.
See page 225 for more information about the
radio.

RSE front screen menus
To access this menu, begin by selecting RSE
under MEDIA by pressing this button on the
front center console (or by using the remote
control or the steering wheel keypad). Continue
by pressing OK/MENU to access the menu.
Turn TUNE to the desired selection and confirm by pressing OK/MENU.
Settings can be made for the left or right rear
screen separately or for both screens (Left
RSE screen menu, Right RSE screen
menu and Both RSE screen menus):

Power off/Power on
RADIO
MEDIA

RSE menus

RSE settings

Introduction
Settings in the RSE menus can be made from
the front center console control panel or by
using the remote control in the rear seat. A
source for one of the rear screens can be activated from the front center control panel and
certain settings for the rear screens can also be
made from this panel.

Mute

Display off
Disable remote control (front)
Reset all RSE settings

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

261

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
RSE pop-up menu6
Press
on the remote control while a video
file is playing to display the pop-up menu. Use
the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote
to make menu selections. See page 264 for
detailed information about the remote control.
Screen aspect ration

The menus for AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1* and
SAT2* are:
Day/Night mode

Source menu7

DVD disc menu
Subtitles

Disc menu
Random

Reset all CD settings

RSE CD/DVD Data menu
Disc menu

Use the scroll wheel and the buttons on the
remote to make menu selections. See page
264 for detailed information about the remote
control.

Random
Repeat folder
DivX® VOD code
Day/Night mode

RADIO

262

Day/Night mode
Display off
Reset all DVD settings

Day/Night mode
Display off

6
7
8

Audio tracks
Advanced settings

RSE CD Audio menu

RSE rear screen menus

DVD Video Menu

Reset all RSE settings
MEDIA

DVD disc menu8

Press
on the remote control when a
source (e.g., Disc) has been selected to access
the RSE-menus for the rear screens.

RSE DVD Video menu

Display off

Image settings
Day/Night mode

Reset all CD/DVD settings

Display off

Applies only when a video file is playing.
The content of the menu will vary according to what is being played, for example CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
Applies to DVD videos only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

RSE USB menu
USB menu
Random
Repeat folder
DivX® VOD code
Select USB device
Day/Night mode
Display off
Reset all USB settings

06 Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
RSE AUX menu

Display off

AUX menu

Reset all Bluetooth settings

AUX input volume
Day/Night mode
Display off
Reset all AUX settings

RSE A/V-AUX menu
A/V AUX menu
A/V AUX input volume
Day/Night mode
Display off
Reset all A/V-AUX settings

RSE iPod menu
iPod menu
06

Random
Day/Night mode
Display off
Reset all iPod settings

RSE Bluetooth menu
Bluetooth menu
Random
Day/Night mode

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

263

06 Infotainment
Remote control*
Remote control1

NOTE

The remote control included with the Rear Seat
Entertainment system (RSE)* can be used to
control all of the infotainment system's functions.

Avoid exposing the remote control to strong
sunlight, for instance by leaving it on the
dashboard. This could cause problems with
its batteries.

To use the remote, begin by pressing its
button to select a screen (L: left rear
screen, F: front screen, or R: right rear screen).
Continue by pointing the remote toward the
selected rear screen's IR transceiver (see the
illustration on page 255) or to the front screen's
IR transceiver located to the right of the INFO
button on the center console.

Button

Function
Select a screen (L: left rear), (F:
front) or (R: right rear)
Switch to the optional Volvo Navigation system
Select one of the infotainment
system's radio wavebands (AM,
FM1, etc.)

To control one of the rear RSE screens, select
butL (left)/R (right) using the remote's
ton. Continue by pointing the remote at the
selected screen's IR transceiver (see the illustration on page 255 for its location).

Select one of the infotainment
system's sources (Disc, USB,
etc.)

WARNING
Select the Bluetooth hands-free
feature

To help avoid the risk of injuries in the event
of sudden braking or a collision, always
stow loose objects such as the remote control, cell phones, cameras, etc. in the glove
compartment or other storage compartments when not in use.

264

Vehicles with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment system only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fast reverse, change tracks/
songs
Play/pause

The scroll wheel has the same function as
TUNE in the center console control panel.

06 Infotainment
Remote control*
Button

Function
Stop
Fast forward, change tracks/
songs
DVD menu
Go back one step in a menu, cancel a function or delete entered
characters
Navigate up/down
Navigate right/left

Button

It is advisable to have extra batteries on long
trips.

Function
One-button access to frequently
used functions (which must be
programmed into the button, see
page 220
Information about the current
film, song, etc., or to display
information not currently shown
on the screen
Select language for audio tracks
Subtitles, select subtitle language

1. Press down on the battery cover and slide
it in the direction indicated in the illustration.

Not in use
Confirm a selection or go to the
current source's main menu
Reduce volume
Increase volume
0-9

Use to select preset channels or
enter characters

Replacing batteries
The remote control runs on four AA/LR6 batteries.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert new
ones in the directions indicated by the
symbols in the battery holder.

3. Slide the cover back into place.
Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner.

NOTE
The batteries' normal service life ranges
from 1-4 years, depending on how often the
remote is used. If the remote is not working
properly, try replacing the four AA/LR6 batteries.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

265

Driving recommendations.....................................................................
Refueling...............................................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Cargo area ...........................................................................................
Towing a trailer......................................................................................
Emergency towing................................................................................

266

268
271
276
280
283
286

DURING YOUR TRIP

07 During your trip
Driving recommendations
General information
Economical driving conserves natural
resources
Better driving economy may be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops
and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to
immediate traffic conditions.
Observe the following rules:

• Do not exceed posted speed limits.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.

• Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).

• Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
ice has ended.

• Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
increase air resistance and also fuel consumption.

• Bring the engine to normal operating temperature as soon as possible by driving
with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for
the first few minutes of operation. A cold
engine uses more fuel and is subject to
increased wear.

• Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle
for driving short distances. This does not
allow the engine to reach normal operating
temperature.

• Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration
and hard braking.

• Use the transmission's Drive (D) position
as often as possible and avoid using kickdown.

• Using the transmission's Sport mode1 may
increase fuel consumption somewhat. Use
the transmission's Drive (D) position as
often as possible. See page 122 for additional information about Sport mode.
1

268

Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

• At highway driving speeds, fuel consumption will be lower with the air conditioning
on and the windows closed than with the
air conditioning off and the windows open.

• Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn
how to drive more economically.
Other factors that decrease gas mileage
are:

•
•
•
•

Dirty air cleaner
Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter
Dragging brakes
Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and others
are checked at the standard maintenance
intervals.

WARNING
Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with
the tailgate open could lead to poisonous
exhaust gases entering the passenger compartment. If the tailgate must be kept open
for any reason, proceed as follows:

•
•

Close the windows
Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side windows and the blower control to its highest setting.

Weight distribution affects handling
At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a
tendency to understeer, which means that the
steering wheel has to be turned more than
might seem appropriate for the curvature of a
bend. This ensures good stability and reduces
the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that
these properties can alter with the vehicle load.
The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less
the tendency to understeer.

Handling, roadholding
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure
all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check
that the tires are inflated to the recommended
pressure according to the vehicle load. See the
"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-

07 During your trip
Driving recommendations
tributed so that capacity weight or maximum
permissible axle loads are not exceeded.

CAUTION

•

Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.

•

If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may
enter the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating
capacity and may shorten the service
life of these components.

Driving through water

• The vehicle can be driven through water up
to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm),
at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

• Take particular care when driving through
flowing water.

• Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water.

•

Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
water up to the door sills longer than
absolutely necessary. This could result
in electrical malfunctions.

•

If the engine has been stopped while the
vehicle is in water, do not attempt to
restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of
the water.

• When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING
After driving through water, press lightly on
the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes
are functioning normally. Water or mud can
make the brake linings slippery, resulting in
delayed braking effect.

Engine and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example when
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and
cooling system will overheat. Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the engine.

• Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep hills.

• Do not turn the engine off immediately
when stopping after a hard drive.

WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to
operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine
has been switched off.

• Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of
the grille when driving in hot weather conditions.

• Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm
if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil
temperature could become too high.

Conserving electrical current
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
battery drain:

• When the engine is not running, avoid
using ignition mode II. Many electrical systems (the audio system, the optional navigation system, power windows, etc) will
function in ignition modes 0 and I. These
modes reduce drain on the battery.

• Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc., that consume a great
deal of current when the engine is not running could result in the battery being completely drained. Driving or having the
engine running for approximately
15 minutes will help keep the battery
charged.

• The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo
area provides electrical current even with

269

07 During your trip
Driving recommendations
the ignition switched off, which drains the
battery.

Before a long distance trip
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before driving long distances.
Your retailer will also be able to supply you with
bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for
your use in the event that problems occur.

• Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice
are likely to occur, consider snow tires.

Cold weather precautions

As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:

• Check that engine runs smoothly and that

• Make sure that the engine coolant contains

•
•
•
•
•

Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.
Have the transmission oil level checked.
Check condition of drive belts.
Check state of the battery's charge.
Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are worn.
Check tire pressures.

• The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.

• Check all lights, including high beams.
• Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.

270

Volvo service technician if you intend to
drive in countries where it may be difficult
to obtain the correct fuel.

If you wish to check your vehicle before the
approach of cold weather, the following advice
is worth noting:

fuel consumption is normal.

• Have a word with a trained and qualified

50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture
will reduce freeze protection. This gives
protection against freezing down to
–31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Different
types of antifreeze must not be mixed.

• Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

• Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
helps prevent the formation of condensation in the tank. In addition, in extremely
cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to
add fuel line de-icer before refueling.

• The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
cold-weather starting as well as decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is
warming up. 0W-30 oil is recommended for

driving in areas with sustained low temperatures.

• The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc., are used more often.
Moreover, the capacity of the battery
decreases as the temperature drops. In
very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check the state of charge
more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil
on the battery posts.

• Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving, see
page 304.

• To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
freezing, add washer solvents containing
antifreeze. This is important since dirt is
often splashed on the windshield during
winter driving, requiring the frequent use of
the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer
Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down
to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and
4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part
washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to
0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and
2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C):
1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.

• Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
• Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.

07 During your trip
Refueling
Fuel requirements
Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits. Detergent
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit
control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station operator.

NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of external fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter
and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and
Canadian regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps have nozzles which
fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled
"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline
damages the three-way catalytic converter and
the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated
use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

ness of the emission control system and could
result in loss of emission warranty coverage.
State and local vehicle inspection programs
will make detection of misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test failure for misfueled vehicles.

sonal air quality standards, some areas require
the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed
on page 272 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol

NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain
an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission
Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please
return your vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,
"Oxygenated fuels"
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
require that the service pump be marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
there are areas in which the pumps are
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check
with the service station operator. To meet sea-

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume
may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to
as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to
15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol
Do not use gasolines containing methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice
can result in vehicle performance deterioration
and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

271

07 During your trip
Refueling
Octane rating

NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable.

Minimum octane

Fuel Formulations

G028920

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.
Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead has been
strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane1 or above will
not affect engine reliability.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,
or driving for extended periods at higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to
switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to
change gasoline brands to fully utilize your
engine's capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation.

272

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
where you must fill your own gas tank, take
precautions. These may include:

• standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling

• refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth
of the filler neck during refueling

• wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives
With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thicken-

AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

ers, or other store-bought additives to your
vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.
Overuse may damage your engine, and some
of these additives contain organically volatile
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself
to these chemicals.

WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched
on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone
rings, this may cause a spark that could
ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and
injury.

WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes
inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger
compartment is ventilated, and immediately
return the vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for correction.

07 During your trip
Refueling
tral locking button does not lock the fuel
filler door.

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

Manually opening the fuel filler door

• Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed
and is completely closed after refueling.

• Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot
weather.
Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click
indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION

•
The fuel filler door is located on the right rear
fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel
)
tank symbol on the information display
With the ignition switched off, press and
release the button on the lighting panel to
unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the
fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the
vehicle begins to move forward. An audible
click will be heard when the fuel filler door
relocks.

Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.
In addition to causing damage to the
environment, gasolines containing
alcohol can cause damage to painted
surfaces, which may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened
manually:
1. Open the side hatch in the cargo compartment (on the same side as the fuel filler
door).
2. Grasp the green cord with a handle.
3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until
the fuel filler door clicks open.
07

• If you intend to leave your vehicle while it
is being refueled, this feature enables you
to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the
fuel filler door unlocked.

• You can also keep the vehicle locked if you
remain inside it during refueling. The cen-

273

07 During your trip
Refueling
Opening/closing the fuel cap

CAUTION

•

Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle
more than one extra time. Too much fuel
in the tank in hot weather conditions can
cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling
could also cause damage to the emission control systems.

Emission controls

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.

Three-way catalytic converter

• Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
systems, may cause unusually high threeway catalytic converter temperatures. Do
not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of
power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help

• Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system and cause such materials to ignite
under certain wind and weather conditions.

• Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating.

• Remember that tampering or unauthorized

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the
filler cap slowly.

274

Do not refuel with the engine running2.
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the
ignition is on, an incorrect reading could
occur in the fuel gauge.

avoid malfunctions that could damage the
three-way catalytic converter.

modifications to the engine, the Engine
Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This
includes: altering fuel injection settings or
components, altering emission system
components or location or removing components, and/or repeated use of leaded
fuel.

NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.

If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's
performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

07 During your trip
Refueling
Heated oxygen sensors
The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings
are fed into a control module that continuously
monitors engine functions and controls fuel
injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine
is continuously adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce harmful emissions.

275

07 During your trip
Loading

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
determined by factors such as the number of
passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight
of any accessories that may be installed, etc.
To increase loading space, the rear seat backrests can be folded down, see page 89.
When loading the cargo area, keep the following in mind:

• Load objects in the cargo area against the
backrest whenever possible.

WARNING

•

Stop the engine, put the gear selector in
P, and apply the parking brake when
loading or unloading long objects.

•

The vehicle's driving characteristics
may change depending on the weight
and distribution of the load.

•

A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a
force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a
head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

•

• Unstable loads can be secured to the load
anchoring eyelets with straps or web lashings to help keep them from shifting.

• Stop the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading or unloading long
objects. The gear selector can be knocked
out of position by long loads, which could
set the vehicle in motion.

Power tailgate*

G031965

Introduction

Power tailgate closing button

Automatic opening
The power tailgate can be opened automatically in the three ways:

• By pressing and holding the

button on the lighting panel until the tailgate
begins to open.

• By pressing and holding the

button
on the remote key until the tailgate begins
to open.

• By pressing the rubber-covered button
under the outer handle on the tailgate.
The taillights illuminate automatically when the
automatic open function is used.

276

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 During your trip
Loading
CAUTION
Be sure that there is adequate space above
and behind the vehicle before opening the
tailgate automatically.
The vehicle should not be driven or moved
with the tailgate in the open position. However, if the vehicle is moved with the tailgate
in the open position, the automatic closing
function will be inoperative until one of the
following occurs:

•
•

The tailgate is closed manually
The ignition is switched off and the key
is removed for approximately 10
minutes (the tailgate will function again
after restart).

Programming the tailgate opening angle

Interrupting automatic opening/closing

The tailgate's maximum opening angle can be
programmed, which can be useful, for example, if the tailgate has to be opened in a garage
with a low ceiling.

Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can
be interrupted in four ways:

To do so:

• Open the tailgate manually, hold it at the
desired maximum opening angle and
press the tailgate's closing button for at
least 3 seconds. When the tailgate is
released, programming is complete.

• To remove this programming, open the tailgate manually to a higher opening angle.

Automatic closing
The power tailgate can be closed by pressing

NOTE
If the tailgate has been opened and closed
continuously for more than 60 seconds, the
automatic function will be deactivated to
avoid overloading the electrical system. The
automatic function can be used again after
approximately 10 minutes.
If the vehicle's battery has been discharged
or disconnected, the tailgate must be
opened and closed once manually to reset
the system.

the
button on the tailgate (see the illustration) or by pressing it down.

NOTE
If the tailgate is pressed down e.g., by the
weight of snow or strong wind, it will close
automatically.

• By pressing the

button on the

lighting panel.

• By pressing the

button on the

remote key.

• By pressing the button on the lower edge
of the tailgate.

• By pressing the rubber-covered button
under the outer handle on the tailgate.
If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate will
stop and reopen.

Pinch protection
If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being
operated, the pinch protection function is activated.

• If the tailgate is being opened, the electrical function will be switched off and the
tailgate will be released from the electrical
system.

• If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop
WARNING
Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when
it is opened or closed automatically. The
tailgate should never be obstructed in any
way when it is operated.

and reopen.

Operating the tailgate manually
The power tailgate can be disconnected from
the vehicle’s electrical system by quickly pull-

277

07 During your trip
Loading
WARNING

•

Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops.

•

Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining
straps.

•

Always secure the load to help prevent
it from moving in the event of sudden
stops.

•

Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P
when loading and unloading the vehicle.

Folding down the rear seat backrests
The rear seat backrests can be folded down for
additional loading space, see page 91.

Load anchoring eyelets

Grocery bag holder*

G017745

ing the outer handle twice. The tailgate can
then be opened/closed manually.

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo
area

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags
in place.
1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo
area.
2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

278

The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the
vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help
anchor items in the cargo area.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 During your trip
Loading
Roof loads
Using load carriers
Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. Observe the following points when in use:

• The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel consumption will increase with the size of the
load.

• Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast
cornering and hard braking.

• To avoid damaging your vehicle and to
achieve maximum safety when driving, we
recommend using the load carriers that
Volvo has developed especially for your
vehicle.

• Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
designed to carry the maximum allowable
roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).
For non-Volvo roof racks, check the manufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

• Never exceed the rack manufacturer's
weigh limits and never exceed the maximum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

• Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
evenly.

• Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.

• Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment.

• Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured.

• Remember that the vehicle's center of
gravity and handling change when you
carry a load on the roof.

279

07 During your trip
Cargo area
Steel cargo grid*

Installing the steel cargo grid

Installing the cover

For information about the necessary tools and
procedures for installing/removing the steel
cargo grid, please refer to the assembly
instructions1 that were included when the grid
was purchased.

1. Press the end piece on one side of the
cargo area cover into the retaining bracket
.
in the side panel of the cargo area
2. Do the same on the opposite side

3. Press both sides of the cover until they
click into place
. The red mark will no
longer be visible.

Cargo area cover*

G031978

4. Check that both ends of the cover are
securely locked in place.

Removing the cover
1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover
inward.

G031977

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid
that helps prevent objects in the cargo area
from moving forward into the passenger compartment.

Folding the grid up/down
Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it
rearward/upward, or push it downward/forward.

Use

• Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it
If the steel grid is to be used with the
optional cargo area cover, the grid must be
folded down before the cargo area cover is
put in place.

280

into the holes in the rear cargo area pillars.

NOTE

• To retract (roll up) the cover, release it from

Assembly instruction no. 30715972.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

the holes and guide it toward the rear seat
backrest.

2. Pull the cover carefully upward and outward. The other end will release automatically from its retaining bracket.

Folding down the cargo area cover's rear
flap
The cargo area cover's rear flap points horizontally when the cover is retracted (rolled up).
To fold it down:
–

Pull the flap slightly rearward past its supports and fold it down.

07 During your trip
Cargo area
NOTE

WARNING

On models equipped with this cover, it
should be removed before a child seat is
attached to the child restraint anchors.

G034213

Cargo net*

Cargo net mounted in rear position

Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo net
made of strong nylon fabric that helps prevent
objects in the cargo area from moving forward
into the passenger compartment.
The net can be attached in two different places:

• Rear position: behind the rear seat backrest

•

Be sure that the cargo net's upper
attachment hooks are properly inserted
in the brackets and that the lower straps
are correctly attached and pulled taut.

•

A damaged cargo net should never be
used.

•

Objects in the cargo area should be
securely anchored, even if the cargo net
is correctly installed and in use.

Mounting the cargo net

Cargo net in rear position

The cargo net is easiest to put in place through
one of the rear doors.

4. Mounting in the rear position: With the net's
rod attached to the rear upper brackets,
hook the lower straps in the floor eyelets in
the cargo area. Pull the net strap taut.

1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure that the
upper hinged rod is straight and locked in
position.
2. Insert one end of the rod into the front or
rear bracket (near the ceiling). Be sure that
the lock on the lower strap is facing toward
you.
3. Insert the other end of the rod in the opposite bracket.

– Be sure to press the end hooks on the rod
as far forward as possible in the brackets.

• Front position: behind the front seat backrests

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

281

07 During your trip
Cargo area
Removing and storing the cargo net

Cargo net in front position

Mounting in the front position: With the
net's rod attached to the front upper brackets, hook the lower straps in the eyelets in
the front seat rails. Attaching the net is easier if the front seat backrests are upright
and the seats are moved slightly forward.

Press the release buttons on the locks on
the straps and pull out a small section of
the strap.

If the front seats are moved rearward, they
should not press hard against the net.

Fold up the net's rod at the center and roll
up the net.

CAUTION
Pressure from the front seats against the
cargo net could damage the net and/or its
brackets.

5. Pull the net strap taut.

282

Press in the catches on the straps' hooks
and remove the hooks from the eyelet.

When not in use, the cargo net can be stored
under floor of the cargo area.

07 During your trip
Towing a trailer
when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.
Use a lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle
enters the red range.

Introduction
Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer
hitches that are specially designed for the vehicle.

WARNING

•

Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
not be used on Volvos, nor should
safety chains be attached to the
bumper.

•

Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.

•

Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle
brake system, nor a trailer's lighting
system directly to the vehicle lighting
system. Consult your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for correct installation.

•

When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
wire must be correctly fastened to the
hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch
on the vehicle. The safety wire should
never be fastened to or wound around
the drawbar ball.

• If the automatic transmission begins to
overheat, a message will be displayed in
the text window.

NOTE
See page 361 for the maximum trailer and
tongue weights recommended by Volvo.

• Observe the legal requirements of the
state/province in which the vehicles are

• All Volvo models are equipped with
energy-absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer hitch installation should not
interfere with the proper operation of this
bumper system.
Trailer towing does not normally present any
particular problems, but take into consideration:

• Increase tire pressure to recommended full
pressure. See the tire inflation table on
page 297.

• When your vehicle is new, avoid towing
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles
(1,000 km).

• Avoid overload and other abusive operation.

• Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability, and economy.

• It is necessary to balance trailer brakes
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a
safe stop (check and observe state/local
regulations).

• Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.

• More frequent vehicle maintenance is
required.

• Remove the ball holder when the hitch is
not being used.

•

Volvo recommends the use of synthetic
engine oil when towing a trailer over long
distances or in mountainous areas.

• Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).

• Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant
temperature should be closely watched

283

07 During your trip
Towing a trailer
NOTE

•

When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake before
putting the gear selector in P. Always
follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end
of the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder

When starting on a hill, put the gear
selector in D before releasing the parking brake. See also page 128 for more
detailed information about starting off
on a hill while towing a trailer.

If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make
sure the gear you select does not put
too much strain on the engine (using too
high a gear).

The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may
be rated for trailers heavier than the
vehicle is designed to tow. Please
adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer
weights.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 15%.

Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer
hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has
7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on
the ground.

284

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt
and slide the locking bolt out of the ball
holder/hitch assembly.
D

G010496

•

Detachable trailer hitch (accessory)

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.

NOTE
Ball holder
Locking bolt

A cover for the hitch assembly is also
included in the kit.

Cotter pin
Hitch assembly
Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder
1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt
out of the hitch assembly.
2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one
in the hitch assembly.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)
Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to
help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer
when the vehicle and trailer have begun to
sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and
Traction Control system (DSTC). See page
134 for information on DSTC.

Function
A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for
various reasons. Normally this only occurs at
high speeds but, for example, if the trailer is
overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed
in the trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds

07 During your trip
Towing a trailer
between approximately 45-55 mph (70-90 km/
h).
Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

• The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,
strong crosswind

• The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an
uneven road surface or drive over a bump

• Sudden movements of the steering wheel
Facts about TSA

• TSA intervenes at speeds above approximately 40 mph (60 km/h)

• The DSTC symbol (

) in the instrument panel will flash when TSA is working

movement. If the system detects a tendency to
sway, the brakes are applied individually on the
front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on
the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to
enable the driver to regain control of the vehicle.
If this is not adequate to stop the swaying
motion, the brakes are applied to all of the
wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is
equipped with brakes, and engine power is
temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion
begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have
once again become stable, TSA will no stop
regulating the brakes/engine power and the
driver regains control of the vehicle.

• If the driver switches off the DSTC system's Spin Control function, TSA will also
be switched off (but will be on again the
next time the engine is started)

• TSA may not intervene when the vehicle
and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries
to compensate for the swaying motion by
moving the steering wheel rapidly

How TSA works

Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult to stop, which makes it difficult to control
the vehicle and trailer.
The TSA system continuously monitors the
vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

285

07 During your trip
Emergency towing
Towing eyelet

ded on the right sides of either the front or
rear bumper (see illustration).
There are two different types of covers over
the openings for the towing eyelet and they
have to be opened differently.

• If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,
etc., into the notch and pry open the
edge of the cover. Open the cover completely and remove it.
Location of the towing eyelet

• If the cover has a mark along one edge
or in a corner, press the mark while prying out the opposite side/corner using a
coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it.
Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand
and then using the tire iron until it is securely in
place.
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet
should be removed and returned to its storage
location.
Press the cover for the attachment point back
into position.

Attaching the towing eyelet

Attaching the towing eyelet
The towing eyelet is located under the floor
of the cargo area, with the spare tire and
may be partially concealed. This eyelet
must be screwed into the positions provi-

286

NOTE
On certain models equipped with a trailer
hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed
into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing
rope should be attached to the trailer hitch
instead. For this reason, the detachable
section of the trailer hitch should be safely
stowed in the vehicle at all times.

07 During your trip
Emergency towing
WARNING

•

1
2

When the vehicle is being towed, the
ignition should be in mode II (in mode I,
all of the vehicle's airbags are deactivated). See page 85 for more information about ignition modes.
Never remove the remote key from the
ignition slot when the vehicle is being
towed. For vehicles with keyless drive,
the remote key must remain inside the
vehicle.
The power brakes and power steering
will not function when the engine is not
running. Approximately 5 times more
pressure will be required on the brake
pedal and the steering wheel will be
considerably harder to turn.

Towing the vehicle
1. With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to
activate ignition mode II.

CAUTION
General towing precautions:

•

Please check with state and local
authorities before attempting this type
of towing, as vehicles being towed are
subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of
towing device, lighting, etc.

•

If the vehicle's battery is dead, attach
jumper cables (see page 119) to provide
current for releasing the electric parking
brake and to move the gear selector
from the P position to N. If this is not
possible, see page 123 for information
about manually overriding the shiftlock
system to move the gear selector from
P to N.

•

Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do
not exceed the maximum allowable
towing speed.

•

Maximum distance with front wheels on
ground: 50 miles (80 km).

•

The vehicle should only be towed in the
forward direction.

2. The remote key must remain in the ignition
slot2 for the entire time that the vehicle is
being towed.
3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing
vehicle slows down by applying light pressure on the brake pedal. This will help prevent jarring movements of the vehicle
being towed.
4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the
vehicle being towed.

The towing eyelets must not be used for
pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for
any similar purpose involving severe
strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to
pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow
truck.

Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
For vehicles with the the optional keyless dirive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

287

07 During your trip
Emergency towing
Having the vehicle towed by a tow
truck
Call for professional help from an authorized
towing company.Volvo recommends the use of
flat bed equipment.

CAUTION

•

The vehicle should always be towed in
the forward direction.

•

Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*
that are being towed with the front
wheels off the ground should not be
towed at a speed above approx. 45 mph
(70 km/h) and should not be towed farther than 30 miles (50 km).

•

If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelet must not be
used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat
bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat
bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

288

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 During your trip

289

General information ..............................................................................
Tire inflation...........................................................................................
Inflation pressure .................................................................................
Tire designations ..................................................................................
Glossary of tire terminology .................................................................
Vehicle loading .....................................................................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...............................................................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ...............................................
Temporary Spare .................................................................................
Tire Sealing System..............................................................................
Changing a wheel ................................................................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).............................................

290

292
295
297
298
300
301
303
304
305
306
312
316

WHEELS AND TIRES

08 Wheels and tires
General information
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening).

CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry
pavement performance with consideration
for hydroplaning resistance. They may be
more susceptible to road hazard damage
and, depending on driving conditions, may
achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles
(30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped
with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC system, these tires are not designed for winter
driving, and should be replaced with winter
tires when weather conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces.
08

Most models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree
of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires
1

292

Option or accessory on some models

without the "all-season" rating. However, for
optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered
roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on
all four wheels.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires
are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all
four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering
the car's roadholding and handling characteristics.

New Tires

Tire rotation
Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire
wear is affected by a number of factors such
as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving
style, etc.

NOTE

•

If the tires are rotated, they should only
be moved from front to rear or vice
versa. They should never be rotated left
to right/right to left.

•

Ideally, tire rotation should be done the
first time after approximately 3,000
miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at
6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some
customers find that tire rotation may
help to get extra mileage from tire life.

•

Tire rotation should only be performed
if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and
tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Tire age
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As
of 2000, the manufacturing week and year
(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)
will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means
that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2010).

Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent
high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.)
exposure can accelerate the aging process.
The temporary spare1 should also be replaced

08 Wheels and tires
General information
as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the
same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been
used.
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

Summer and winter tires

Improving tire economy

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration
should be replaced immediately.

• Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire
inflation table on page 297.

• Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard

Tread wear indicator

braking and tire screeching.

G021778

• Tire wear increases with speed.
• Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.

• Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.

• Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
G021829

• When replacing tires, the tires with the

The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI
are printed on the side of the tire. When
approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the
tread, these strips become visible and indicate
that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less
than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor traction.
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size

most tread should be mounted on the rear
wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer
during hard braking.

• Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the
tire

• When switching between summer and
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,
LF = left front, RR = right rear

• Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.

• Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
braking properties and ability to force
aside rain, snow and slush.

• The tires with the most tread should always
be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skidding).

• Contact a Volvo workshop if you are

unsure about the tread depth.
``

293

08 Wheels and tires
General information
Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
on rims), they should be suspended off the
floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not
be suspended.

CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored
in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,
etc.

WARNING

294

•

The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling.

•

Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
Inflation placard

G032521

NOTE

Tire inflation placard

Tire inflation
Check tire inflation pressure regularly.
See the tire inflation table on page 297. A tire
inflation pressure placard is also located on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at
the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's
door opening). This placard indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your
vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pressure.

•

The placards shown indicate inflation
pressure for the tires installed on the
vehicle at the factory only.

•

A certain amount of air seepage from
the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes
in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
pressure, including the spare, at least once
a month and before long trips. You are
strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate.

• Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and
wear.

• Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING

•

Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury.

•

Under-inflated tires reduce the load carrying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur, tire
inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree
temperature drop causes a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check
your tire pressures frequently and adjust them
to the proper pressure, which can be found on
the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label.

Checking tire pressure
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the
tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

295

08 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If
you have to drive farther than this distance to
pump your tire(s), check and record the tire
pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold
pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.

NOTE

•

If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center
of the valve. Then recheck the pressure
with your tire gauge.
Some spare tires require higher inflation
pressure than the other tires. Consult
the tire inflation pressure table on page
297 or see the inflation pressure placard.

To check inflation pressure:
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the
valve.

Tire ratings

2. Add air to reach the recommended air
pressure.

The speed ratings in the table translate as follow:

Speed ratings

3. Replace the valve cap.
4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there
are no nails or other objects embedded
that could puncture the tire and cause an
air leak.

296

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregularities.

Speed ratings
M

81 mph (130 km/h)

100 mph (160 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

Speed ratings
W

168 mph (270 km/h)

186 mph (300 km/h)

Load ratings
See page 298 for an explanation of the load
rating on the sidewall of the tire.

08 Wheels and tires
Inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 295 for its location) for information
specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size

235/65 R17

Cold tire pressure for up to five persons
Front

Rear

psi (kPa)

35 (240)

61 (420)

235/60 R18
235/55 R19
255/45 R20
Temporary spare tire
T125/80R17

NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date specifications.

297

08 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
Information on the sidewall
5

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width
in percent.
4

3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the
symbol indicate that the vehicle is
equipped with optional self-supporting run
flat tires1. See page 318 for more information about these tires).

10
3
2
12

G010753

11
1

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall
of all tires (see the illustration).
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
The tire designation:

NOTE
Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this
particular tire may not be available on your
vehicle.
08

298

Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of
1521 lbs (690 kg).
6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and
with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph
(210 km/h).

NOTE
The tire's load index and speed rating may
not appear on the sidewall because they are
not required by law.

7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All
Terrain, AS = All Season
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code
and the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For example, 1510 means that the tire was manufactured during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in between are marketing codes used
at the manufacturer's discretion. This information helps a tire manufacturer identify a
tire for safety recall purposes.
9. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies indicates or the number of layers of rubbercoated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate the
ply materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester, and
others.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard located on the B-Pillar
for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades: see page 303 for more information.
12. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

299

08 Wheels and tires
Glossary of tire terminology
Terms

• Tire information placard: A placard

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load
at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tires load
carrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tire's load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

300

unit of air pressure.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the side

showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard

The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load,
radial tubeless, etc.

of the vehicle behind the front door.
to the rim.

•

Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or
a tire and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.

• Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This
rating is established by the tire manufacturer.

• Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

• Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that are
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's side

B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this
chapter.

• Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

08 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
Loads

Permissible axle weight

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.

The maximum allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must
never exceed its maximum permissible weight.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard:

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.

Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.

NOTE
For trailer towing information, please refer to
the section "Towing a trailer" on page 283.

NOTE

•

The location of the various labels in your
vehicle can be found on page 358.

•

A table listing important weight limits for
your vehicle can be found on page
361.

Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement "the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750
(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

See page 283.

301

08 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
WARNING

302

•

Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or catastrophic failure.

•

Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires
that were original equipment on the
vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the
correct load carrying capacity. Consult
your Volvo retailer for information.

08 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grading information
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE
GRADES
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:

may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is
not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering
(turning) traction.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and tire failure.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

TEMPERATURE

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and many depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving
habits, maintenance practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a minimum level of performance that all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

303

08 Wheels and tires
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires
Winter driving conditions
Snow chains
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with
the following restrictions:

• Snow chains should be installed on front

CAUTION

•

Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.

•
•

Use single-sided snow chains only.

wheels only. Use only Volvo approved
snow chains.

• If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires
and wheels are installed and are of a size
different than the original tires and wheels,
chains in some cases CANNOT be used.
Sufficient clearances between chains and
brakes, suspension and body components
must be maintained.

• Some strap-on type chains will interfere
with brake components and therefore
CANNOT be used.

• All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front
wheels.

• Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devices.
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
chain information.

•

Always follow the chain manufacturer's
installation instructions carefully. Install
chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed limit. (Under
no circumstances should you exceed
31 mph (50 km/h).

•

Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.

•

The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires1
Tires for winter use:

• Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions are strongly
advised to fit suitable winter tires to help
retain the highest degree of traction.

• It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during
1

304

Where permitted

cornering, braking, and accelerating. Failure to do so could reduce traction to an
unsafe level or adversely affect handling.

• Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire road
grip.

• Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads
in warm weather. They should be removed
when the winter driving season has ended.

• Studded tires should be run-in
300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during
which the vehicle should be driven as
smoothly as possible to give the studs the
opportunity to seat properly in the tires.
The tires should have the same rotational
direction throughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE
Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter
tires before installing such tires.

08 Wheels and tires
Temporary Spare
Spare tire
The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Temporary Spare".
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard
on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should
be maintained irrespective of which position on
the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on.
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one
can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It
must be replaced as soon as possible by a
standard tire. Road holding and handling
may be affected with the "Temporary
Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).

CAUTION
The vehicle must not be driven with wheels
of different dimensions or with a spare tire
other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can
seriously damage your car's transmission.
08

Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

305

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
Location

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front
tunnel console, on the rear side of the center
console in the rear seat and in the cargo area*,
see page 210.

•

After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).

Accessing the tire sealing system

•

Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible to determine if it can
be permanently repaired or must be
replaced.

•

The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.

•

After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.

The tire sealing system is stowed under the
floor of the cargo area. To access it:

WARNING

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.
2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

•
Introduction
Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing
system* that enables you to temporarily seal a
hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,
or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

•

Tires with large holes or tears cannot be
repaired with the tire sealing system.

•

After use, stow the tire sealing system
properly to help prevent rattling.

The system consists of an air compressor, a
container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire’s
inflation valve.

NOTE
08

306

The tire sealing system is only intended
to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not
the sidewall.

The tire sealing system's compressor has
been tested and approved by Volvo.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
Tire sealing system–overview

WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:

•

Speed limit sticker
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Protective hose cover
Air release knob

Air pressure gauge

The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.

Precautions:

•
•
•

Keep out of reach of children.

•

Wash thoroughly after handling.

Inhalation: Move the exposed person to
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention.

•

Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention.

•

Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container to a hazardous or special
waste collection point.

NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.

Do not ingest the contents.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.

First aid:

•

Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.

•

Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the
upper and lower eyelids. Get medical
attention if symptoms occur.

Hose
Bottle with sealing compound

The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex,
natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed.

•

307

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire

NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing
system.

WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash
the affected area immediately with soap and
water.

• Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

•

Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.

•

Keep the tire sealing system away from
children.

•

Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.

•

Apply the parking brake.

4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle
of sealing compound.

NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.

5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING
G014338

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:

• Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
08

308

sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.

1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.
2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it
to the steering wheel hub where it will be
clearly visible to the driver.
3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep
it securely in place and help prevent sealing
compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the tire sealing system’s hose connector onto the valve as
tightly as possible by hand.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.

NOTE
Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sockets is being used while the compressor is in
operation.

8. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING
The vehicle´s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to avoid
battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle
is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system.

9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor
by pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WARNING

•

Never stand next to the tire being inflated
when the compressor is in operation.

•

If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.

•

If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.
The vehicle should not be driven if this
occurs. Contact a towing service or
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if
applicable.

NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily
show an increase in pressure to approximately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is being pumped into the tire. The
pressure should return to a normal level
after approximately 30 seconds.

10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch
off the compressor briefly to get a clear
reading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.

WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi
(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,
turn off the compressor. In this case, the
hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle
should not be driven.

11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the sealing compound in the tire.

309

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the
use of the sealing compound may lead to
incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare
cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.
Use the tire sealing system to check and
adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering
behavior, or noises should occur while driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a
safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,
cracks, or other visible damage, and
recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure
is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue
driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.

Replacing the sealing compound
container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if:

• the tire sealing system has been used to
repair a tire

• the container’s expiration date has passed
(see the date on decal).

NOTE

•

Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be used
again to check the tire’s inflation pressure.
The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle
holder. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician to have the
bottle removed and properly disposed
of.

NOTE
Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure
1. Connect the tire sealing system as described in stage 1.
2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this
chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If
the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire
sealing system’s compressor. If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the
air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.

WARNING
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1
hour, check the inflation pressure in the
damaged tire again before continuing.

310

•

After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system
components must be replaced. Please
consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts.

•

If the sealing compound bottle’s expiration date has passed, please take it to
a Volvo retailer or a recycling station
that can properly dispose of harmful
substances.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
Inflating tires
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate
the tires. To do so:

WARNING

•

1. Park the car in a safe place.
2. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the hose connector
onto the valve as tightly as possible by
hand.
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

•

The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated
place, or outdoors, before using the system. The parking brake should be
securely applied and the gear selector
should be in the P (park) position.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached.
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
12-volt socket.

Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to
get a clear reading from the pressure
gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If the
tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor (press the on/off
switch to position I). If necessary, release
air from the tire by turning the air release
knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.

311

08 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Removing a wheel

WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It
must be replaced as soon as possible by a
standard tire. Road holding and handling
may be affected with the “Temporary
Spare” in use.

CAUTION
The vehicle must never be driven with more
than one temporary spare wheel.
Location of jack*, towing eyelet1 and tools*

Spare wheel
The spare wheel is only intended for temporary
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as
possible. The car's handling may be altered by
the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tire
pressure table on page 297 and in the tire inflation placard on the driver's side door jamb at
the rear of the driver's door opening.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the rim side down. There are two foam
blocks, one under the spare wheel and one
over/inside. The upper one contains all tools.
The same bolt runs through to secure the spare
wheel and the foam blocks.

Taking out the spare wheel
1. Open the floor hatch.
2. Undo the retaining bolt.
3. Lift out the foam block.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
The other two blocks can remain in the spare
wheel well.

312

The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area. See the illustration on page 286 for its location.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

After use
The foam block and spare wheel must be
replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow
on the upper foam block. It should point forward.

Changing a wheel
1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in P.
2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing
eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool*
stowed under the floor of the trunk.
3. Remove the wheel cover (where applicable) using the removal tool or remove the
wheel cover by hand.
4. Block the wheels that are on the ground
with wooden blocks or large stones.

08 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel

Jack attachment points
Lug wrench and towing eyelet

5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug
wrench as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION
The towing eyelet must be screwed into the
lug wrench as far as possible.

6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the
lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the
wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting downward (counterclockwise) pressure.

7. There are two jack attachment points on
each side of the vehicle. Position the jack
correctly in the attachment (see the illustration) and crank while simultaneously
guiding the base of the jack to the ground.
The base of the jack must be flat on a level,
firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising
the vehicle, check that the jack is still correctly positioned in the attachment.

313

08 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
WARNING

WARNING
There are two attachment points near the
rear of the vehicle. Only the rear-most
attachment point is intended for the jack
(see the illustration).

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground.
9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and
remove the wheel.

•

The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.

•

Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface.

•

Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by
a jack.

•

Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.

•

Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•

Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.

•

The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.

•

No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.

NOTE
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came
with your particular model should be used
to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be
lifted more frequently or for a prolonged
period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow this device’s
instructions for use.

Re-installing the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

08
Tighten the lug nuts

314

08 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten handtight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to
103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).
5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).
The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's
inflation valve must be positioned over the
valve.

315

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Introduction
NOTE
USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to check inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit
inflation pressure data to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS
will light up the tire pressure warning light
) (also referred to as a telltale) in the
(
instrument panel and will display one of the
following messages in the text window: Tire
pressure low or

Tire needs air now.
08

316

Not available in all markets or in all models.

NOTE
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute and Tire press. syst Service
required will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
NOTE
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does
not replace normal tire maintenance. For
information on correct tire pressure, please
refer to the tire inflation pressure table in this
chapter or consult your Volvo retailer.

Changing wheels with TPMS

CAUTION

Please note the following when changing or
replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/
tires on the vehicle:

• Only the factory-mounted wheels are

When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press
the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the
valve to help avoid bending or otherwise
damaging the valve.

equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message has
been displayed, and the tire pressure warning
light has come on:
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
inflation pressure of all four tires.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure
(consult the tire pressure placard or the
inflation pressure table on page 297.
3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This
will erase the warning text and the warning
light will go out.

WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire
failure, resulting in a loss of control of the
vehicle.

spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS
sensor.

NOTE

•

If you change to tires with a different
recommended inflation pressure, the
TPMS system must be recalibrated to
these tires. On U.S. models, this must
be done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician. On Canadian models, see the following section "Recalibrating TPMS."

•

If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor is moved to another wheel, the sensor's seal, nut, and valve core should be
replaced.

•

When installing TPMS sensors, the
vehicle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.

• If wheels without TPMS sensors are mounted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed
each time the vehicle is driven above
25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

• Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,
the warning message should not reappear.
If the message is still displayed, drive the
vehicle for several minutes at a speed of
20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the
message.

• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be
fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.
Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of
wheels.

Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models
only)*
In certain cases, it may be necessary to recalibrate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recommended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

317

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
tion pressure table on page 297), for example,
if higher inflation pressure is necessary when
transporting heavy loads, etc.

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings
Car settings Tyre pressure

This is done in the vehicle's menu system. See
page 191 for a description of the menu system.

WARNING

•

4. Select Tyre pressure system and press
OK/MENU to turn the system on or off.

SST tires should only be mounted by
service technicians who are familiar
with tires of this type.

•

SST tires may only be mounted on vehicles equipped with TPMS.

1. Switch off the engine.

Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)*

•

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and
put the ignition in mode I or II (see page
85 for additional information).

Self-supporting run flat tires are available as
optional equipment. The vehicle must be
equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) if tires of this type are installed.

Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tire
has lost inflation pressure.

•

Do not drive farther than 50 miles
(80 km) before replacing a damaged
SST tire.

•

Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard
braking or fast turns.

•

SST tires must be replaced if they are
damaged. A tire of this type cannot be
repaired.

To recalibrate:

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings
Car settings Tyre pressure
4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tyre
pressure and press OK/MENU again.
5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h) continuously for at least
10 minutes.
> When the calibration message is no
longer displayed, TPMS has been recalibrated to the new inflation pressure.

Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian
models only)*
08

1. Switch off the engine.

Tires of this type have specially reinforced
sidewalls that make it possible to continue
driving to a limited extent even though the tire
has lost some or all of its inflation pressure.
These tires are mounted on special rims (normal tires can also be mounted on these rims).
If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yellow TPMS symbol illuminates in the instrument
panel and a text message is also displayed. If
this happens, reduce speed to not more than
50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determine
which tire is damaged. To find the damaged
tire, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.

2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page
85 for additional information).

318

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Wheels and tires

319

Volvo maintenance................................................................................
Maintaining your car.............................................................................
Hood and engine compartment............................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids.....................................................................................................
Replacing bulbs....................................................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid..............................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
Vehicle care...........................................................................................

320

322
323
325
326
328
330
337
339
342
350

MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Volvo maintenance
Introduction
Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance
program outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet. This maintenance program contains inspections and services necessary for the proper function of your
vehicle. The maintenance services contain
several checks that require special tools and
training, and therefore must be performed by a
qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top
condition, specify time-tested and proven
Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
manufacturers to furnish written instructions to
the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
Information" booklet, are not covered by the
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
and material used.

Maintenance
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance
with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of
which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is

322

recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian regulations, the following list of warranties
is provided.

•
•
•
•

New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Systems Limited Warranty

• Emission Design and Defect Warranty
• Emission Performance Warranty
These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet for
detailed information concerning each of the
warranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimize
emissions
Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehicle running well. Your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet provides a com-

prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up
to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle maintenance. The schedule includes components
that affect vehicle emissions. This page
describes some of the emission-related components.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Maintaining your car
Owner maintenance

As needed:

Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.

Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to
reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup
of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt
residues.

The following points can be carried out
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services.

Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect.

Each time the car is refueled:

• Check the engine oil level.
• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.

Monthly:

NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

• Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.

Hoisting the vehicle

• Check that engine coolant and other fluid

They are specially reinforced to bear the weight
of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed
under the front of the engine support frame.
Take care not to damage the splash guard
under the engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it.
Always use axle stands or similar structures.
If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the
front and rear lift arm pads should be centered
under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard
edge of the sill rail (see illustration).

Emission inspection readiness
What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II)?
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnostic information about your vehicle's emission
controls. It can light the Check Engine light
(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A
"fault" is a component or system that is not
performing within an expected range. A fault
may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will
store a message about any fault.

levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.

• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.

• Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.

•

Visually inspect battery terminals for corrosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end
of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo
retailer for additional information.

How do states use OBD II for emission
inspections?
If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the
two jack attachments points should be used.

Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
then read "faults." In some states, this type of

323

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Maintaining your car
inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons.

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.

• If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your
part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.
Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending
on the inspection practices in your area.

• If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or
was lit but went out without service, have
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

• If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A
half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

324

way driving is typically needed to allow
OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo
retailer can provide you with more information on planning a trip.

• Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Hood and engine compartment
Opening and closing the hood

WARNING
Check that the hood locks properly when
closed.

Engine compartment, overview

The appearance of the engine compartment
may vary depending on engine model.

WARNING
The cooling fan (located at the front of the
engine compartment, behind the radiator)
may start or continue to operate (for up to
6 minutes) after the engine has been
switched off.

G031911

WARNING

Coolant expansion tank
Pull the lever located under the left side of
the dash to release the hood lock. An information symbol will illuminate when the
hood is open.
Lift the hood slightly. Press the release
control (located under the right front edge
of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

Power steering fluid reservoir
Dipstick-engine oil
Filler cap-engine oil

Before performing any operations in the
engine compartment, the ignition should
always be completely switched off (in mode
0, see page 85) and there should be no
remote keys in the passenger compartment.
The gear selector should be in the P (park)
position. If the engine has been running,
wait until it has cooled before touching any
components in the engine compartment.
The distributor ignition system operates at
very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury.
Always turn the ignition off when:

•

Replacing distributor ignition components e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

•

Do not touch any part of the distributor
ignition system while the engine is running. This may result in unintended
movements and body injury.

Cover over brake fluid reservoir
Battery
Relay/fuse box
Washer fluid reservoir

325

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Engine oil
Checking the engine oil

Checking and adding oil

The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the
first scheduled maintenance service.

NOTE
Before checking the oil:

• See page 363 for oil specifications.
• Refer to the Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for information on the
oil change intervals.

•

The car should be parked on a level surface.

•

If the engine is warm, wait for at least
10 – 15 minutes after the engine has
been switched off.

CAUTION

•

Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the oil
level becomes too low.

•

Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine.

•

Volvo does not recommend the use of
oil additives.

•

Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.

•

Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This
could cause an increase in oil consumption.

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick

•

Oil changes should be carried out by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lintfree rag.

G021737

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

Checking the oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check
the oil level. The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.

326

09 Maintenance and specifications
Engine oil

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to
the MIN mark, add approximately
0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.
4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

327

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fluids
Coolant

Location of the coolant reservoir

CAUTION

•

If necessary, top up the cooling system
with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze
only (a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze).

•

Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.

•

If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze.

•

The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there
can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage.
Check coolant regularly!

•

Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a
lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze.

Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
See page 364 for information on cooling system capacities.

•

328

Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicle's cooling system.

WARNING

•

Never remove the expansion tank cap
while the engine is warm. Wait until the
engine cools.

•

If it is necessary to top off the coolant
when the engine is warm, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly so that the
overpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

Checking the level
The fluid reservoir is concealed under the
round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first
before the reservoir cap can be accessed.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fluids
The brake fluid should always be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the reservoir. Check, without removing the cap, that
there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.
Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F

Filling
1. Turn and open the cover.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks.

(280 °C), P/N 9437433
Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.

WARNING
If a problem should occur in the power
steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still
possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep
in mind that greater effort will be required to
turn the steering wheel.

Power steering fluid
CAUTION
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking.

When driving under extremely hard conditions
(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to
replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Always entrust brake fluid changing to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake-related
message is shown in the information
display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake
system inspected.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 364.

Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any
other type of brake fluid.

329

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs

Introduction
All bulb specifications are listed on page 336.
The following bulbs should only be replaced by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

WARNING

•

The engine should not be running when
changing bulbs.

•

If the engine has been running just prior
to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that components in the engine compartment will be
hot.

Dome lighting, reading lights
Glove compartment lighting
Footwell lighting

Headlight housing

Turn signals in the door mirrors

WARNING

Approach lighting in the door mirrors
Brake lights/rear fog light/taillights

•

Active Bending Lights* – due to the high
voltage used by these headlights, these
bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

Turn off the lights and remove the
remote key from the ignition before
changing any bulbs.

Rear parking lights
Active Bending Lights
LED bulbs

NOTE
For information regarding any other bulbs
not mentioned in this section, please contact your Volvo retailer or a trained and
authorized Volvo service technician.

The entire headlight housing must be lifted out
when replacing all front bulbs.

CAUTION
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit
on the reflector, which will damage it.

330

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
NOTE

•

Always switch off the ignition before
starting to replace a bulb.

•

The optional Active Bending Light bulbs
contain trace amounts of mercury.
These bulbs should always be disposed
of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

4. (Lower illustration under "Headlight housing")
Unplug the wiring connector by holding
down the clip with your thumb.
Pull out the connector with the other
hand.
5. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens.

Removing the headlight housing

6. Replace the defective bulb(s).

1. Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing
the START/STOP ENGINE button.

Reinserting the headlight housing

2. Remove the remote key from the ignition
slot1.

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into
place.
2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking
pins. Check that they are correctly
inserted. The headlight housing must be
properly inserted and secured in place
before the lighting is switched on or the
remote key is inserted into the ignition slot.
3. Check that the lights function properly.
The headlight wiring must be connected and
the housing must be securely in place before
the ignition is switched on.

Removing the cover to access the
bulbs

3. (Upper illustration under "Headlight housing")
Withdraw the headlight housing's locking pins.
Pull the headlight housing straight out.

CAUTION
When disconnecting the connector, pull on
the connector itself and not on the wiring.

When reinserting the housing, be sure that the
long locking pin (to the left in the illustration) is
securely in place in both of its retaining clamps.

Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

331

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs

NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 330.

1. Open the retaining clamps by pressing
them to the sides.
2. Pull the cover straight out.
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

Low beam, Halogen

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder
downward.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out.
4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it
snaps into place. It can only be secured in
one position.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn
it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be
secured in one position.

6. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight
housing.

High beam, Halogen

7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.

Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 330).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
page 331).

332

Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 330).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
page 331).

1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 330).

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
page 331).

1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 330).

3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the
bulb holder.

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it out of the headlight housing.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the headlight
housing by pulling it straight out.

3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb in the holder until it snaps
in place. It can only be inserted in one way.

4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it
in slightly and turning it counterclockwise.

6. Press the bulb holder into position in the
headlight housing.

5. Press the new bulb into the holder and turn
it clockwise.

7. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb
holder.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight
housing and turn it clockwise.

8. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.

7. Reinstall the headlight housing.

Side marker lights
Turn signals
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 330.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 330).
2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it out of the headlight housing.
3. Pull out the burned out bulb and install a
new one. It can only be inserted in one
position.
4. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight
housing and turn it clockwise.
5. Reinstall the headlight housing.

333

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Replacing bulbs
Rear fog light

The rear fog light (located on the driver's side
of the vehicle) can be reached from behind the
bumper
1. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it
in and turning it counterclockwise.
3. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it
clockwise.
4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.

Location of taillight bulbs

Taillight lens, right side

Parking/side marker lights (LED)

Brake lights and taillights

The brake lights and taillights are replaced from
inside the cargo area.

Side reflector

NOTE
Brake light
Backup light
Turn signal
Brake lights (LED)

NOTE
If an error message remains in the display
after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorized Volvo workshop.

Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 330.

1. Open the panel.
2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it
in and turning it counterclockwise.
4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it
clockwise.
5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.

334

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
License plate lighting

Cargo area lighting

Vanity mirror lighting

G031942

Removing the mirror glass

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing
and pull it out.

NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 330.

3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and
tighten the screws.

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the bulb housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
it back into the bulb housing.

1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the glass
and carefully exert upward pressure to
release the retaining lugs.
2. Snap out the lens.
3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do
not exert too much pressure on the bulb
with the pliers to help avoid damaging it.

Reinstalling the mirror glass
1. Put the lens back into position.
2. Press it into place.

335

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Replacing bulbs
Bulb specifications

336

Lighting
function

Wattage

Bulb

Extra high
beam (models
with Active
Bending
Lights*)

H7 LL

Low beam
(halogen)

Lighting
function

Wattage

Bulb

Backup lights

P21W LL

Brake lights

P21W LL

Cargo area
lighting

SV8.5
(length
43mm)

H11 LL

NOTE

High beam
(halogen)

Front turn signals

PY21W
LL

License plate
lighting

C5W LL

Vanity mirror

W2x4.6d
type T5

Front side
marker lights

W3W LL

Glove compartment
lighting

SV8.5
(length
43mm)

Rear fog light

P21W LL

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date specifications.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Wiper blades
The windshield wiper blades are different
lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer
than the one on the passenger side.

CAUTION
Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in
position before attempting to move them to
the service position.

Service position
1. Insert the remote key into the ignition
slot1 and press the START/STOP
ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in
mode I (see page 85 for detailed information about the ignition modes).
2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
again briefly to switch the ignition off.

Wiper blades in service position

The wiper blades must be in the vertical (service) position for replacement, washing or to lift
them away from the windshield when e.g.,
removing ice or snow. To put them in this position:

button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or
by starting the engine).

CAUTION
If the wiper arms have been folded out from
the windshield while in the service position,
fold them back against the windshield
before returning the wipers to the normal
position to help avoid scratching the paint
on the hood.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering
wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second.
> The wipers will then move to the vertical
(service) position on the windshield.

NOTE
After the wiper arms have been in the service position, the wipers must be switched on
and off at least once before the service position can be used again.

The wipers can be returned to the normal position by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE

Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

337

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Wiper blades and washer fluid
To return the wipers from the service position
to the normal position, fold the wipers back
against the windshield and press the START/
STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition
in mode I (or start the engine).

3. Pull out the blade to release it from the
wiper arm.
4. Press the new wiper blade into place and
check that it seats securely.
5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate
window.

Cleaning
Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean
helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper
blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm
soap solution or car washing detergent.

Filling washer fluid

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

With the wipers in the service position, fold
out the wiper arm from the windshield.
Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade straight out,
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks
into place.
Check that the blade is securely in place.
4. Press the wipers back against the windshield.

338

G032770

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

1. Fold the wiper arm outward.
2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at
the arrow).

The windshield and headlight washers share a
common reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir is located on the
driver's side of the engine compartment. During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled
with windshield washer solvent containing
antifreeze. For capacities, see page 364.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
Warning symbols on the battery

may also further decrease the battery’s
starting capacity.

Risk of explosion

Wear protective goggles.

• Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for
an extended period of time or if the vehicle
is usually only driven short distances.

Recycle properly
Keep away from children.

• Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery.
Avoid smoking, open flames,
and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

CAUTION
NOTE
A used battery should be disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner. Consult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to
a recycling station.

Handling
Contains corrosive acid.

• Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when the

The infotainment system's energy-saving
feature may not function correctly or at all,
and/or a message may be displayed if a
battery charger or jumper cables are not
connected properly.

•

The negative terminal on the battery
must never be used to connect a
jumper cable or a battery charger. Only
the ground point on the chassis may be
used.
See page 119 for an illustration and additional information.

engine is running (for example, when
replacing the battery).

• If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.

• The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold

339

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Battery
WARNING

•

Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.

•
•

Do not smoke near the battery.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.

• Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running, or when the key is in the
ignition. This could damage the vehicle's
electrical system.

• The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is used
directly on the battery.

• To help keep the battery in good condition,
the vehicle should be driven for at least 15
minutes a week or connected to a charger
with an automatic charging function.

• If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.
Keeping the battery fully charged helps
prolong its service life.

NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.

• The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further
decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

Maintenance

• Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

• If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator.

• The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.

• After inspection, be sure the cap over each
battery cell or the cover is securely in
place.

• Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and properly tightened.

340

CAUTION

•

Always use distilled or deionized water
(battery water).

•

Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

Changing

09 Maintenance and specifications
Battery

information in the vehicle's electrical system
can be stored in the control modules.
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber molding so that the rear
cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the
battery
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

WARNING
Connect and disconnect the positive and
negative cables in the correct sequence.

Removal
Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key
from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes
before disconnecting the battery so that all

WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Tighten the clamp that secures the battery.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Be sure that it is correctly connected to
the battery and the vent in the vehicle's
body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See Removal).

Installation
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

341

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fuses
Replacing fuses

Location of the fuse boxes

There are relay/fuse boxes located in the
engine compartment, the passenger compartment, and the cargo area.
If an electrical component fails to function, this
may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way
to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.
To do so:
1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult
to remove, a special fuse removal tool is
located on the inside of the engine compartment fuse box cover.
2. From the side, examine the curved metal
wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.
If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the
same color and amperage (written on the fuse).
If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical
system inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage
or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

342

Engine compartment
Under the glove compartment
Under the glove compartment
Cargo area

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses

Engine compartment

343

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fuses
Engine compartment, upper

Pos

Engine compartment, front

Function

Circuit breaker

Engine compartment, lower

Pos

Function

Engine Control Module
(ECM), transmission, SRS

Heated washer nozzles*

–

Positions
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. Fuses in
are located under
.

•

Headlight washers*

Windshield wipers

Lighting panel

NOTE

•

–

Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be
changed at any time when necessary.
Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/
circuit breakers and should only be
removed or replaced by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
There is a special fuse removal tool on
the underside of the cover.

Climate system blower

40
-

–
ABS pump

ABS valves

Engine compartment box

Auxiliary lights*

Horn

–

Pos

344

Engine Control Module
(ECM)

Active Bending Lightsheadlight leveling*

Circuit breaker

Control module, automatic
transmission

Central electrical module

Circuit breaker

ABS

Compressor A/C

Circuit breaker

Speed-dependent steering
force*

Relay coils

Function

Circuit breaker

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Pos

Function

Starter motor relay

Ignition coils

Engine Control Module

Injection system, mass air
meter, engine control module

A/C compressor, engine
valves, engine control module (6-cyl.), solenoids (6cyl. non-turbo only)

EVAP valve, heated oxygen
sensor

Fuel leakage detection

–
Cooling fan

Electro-hydraulic power
steering

100

345

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fuses
Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse
boxes.

Pos

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

2. The fuses are accessible.

Positions-fuse box A

Pos

Function

Circuit breaker for the infotainment system and for
fuses 16-20

346

Function

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

12-volt socket (cargo area)

Controls in driver's door

Pos

Function

Controls in front passenger's door

Controls in right rear passenger's door

Controls in left rear passenger's door

Keyless drive*

Power driver's seat*

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Pos

Function

Pos

Power front passenger's
seat*

Heated front passenger's
seat*

Folding rear seat head
restraints*

Heated driver's seat*

Infotainment control module

5
5

Infotainment system, SiriusXM൅ satellite radio*

Park assist*, trailer hitch
control module*, park
assist camera*

Infotainment system

All Wheel Drive* control
module

Bluetooth hands-free system

Active chassis system*

Rear Seat Entertainment
system (RSE)*

7.5

Pos

Laminated panoramic roof*

Positions-fuse box B

Pos

Courtesy lighting, climate
system sensor

Function

Heated rear seat* (passenger's side)

Heated rear seat* (driver's
side)

Adaptive cruise control/
collision warning*

Courtesy lighting, rain sensor*

7.5

Steering wheel module

7.5

Cental locking: fuel filler
door

Tailgate window washer

Windshield washer

Tailgate unlock

Electrical folding rear seat
outboard head restraints*

Function
Tailgate wiper

Fuel pump

Climate system control
panel

12-volt sockets

Function

Front courtesy lighting,
driver's door power window controls, power
seat(s)*, HomeLInk® Wireless Control System*

7.5

Instrument panel information display

Alarm movement sensor*
Alarm, On-board diagnostic system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

347

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fuses
Pos

Function

Airbag system, occupant
weight sensor

Collision warning system*

Throttle pedal, auto-dim
mirror function, heated rear
seats*

7.5

348

Brake lights

Laminated panoramic roof*

Immobilizer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions

Pos

Rear fuse box

Electric parking brake (left
side)

Electric parking brake (right
side)

Rear fuse box

Power tailgate*

Trailer socket 1*

NOTE
30
-

Trailer socket 2*

Rear fuse box

Heated rear window

Pos

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date specifications.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

349

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Vehicle care
Washing the car
The following points should be kept in mind
when washing and cleaning the car:

• The car should be washed at regular intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots
adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently
in the wintertime.

• Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax
to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften
the dirt before you wash with a soft
sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

considerably and also helps prolong the
service life of the wiper blades.

• Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel

CAUTION

•

During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be closer
to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not
spray into the locks.

•

Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for
example when refueling.

housings, fenders, etc).

• In areas of high industrial fallout, more frequent washing is recommended.

NOTE
When washing the car, remember to remove
dirt from the drain holes in the doors and
sills.

Special laminated panoramic roof cautions:

•

Always close the laminated panoramic
roof and sun shade before washing your
vehicle.

• Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork

•

as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish
may be permanently damaged.

Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the laminated panoramic roof.

•

Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the laminated panoramic roof.

• A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.

• Dry the car with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.

• Tar spots can be removed with tar remover
after the car has been washed.

• A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper
blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility

350

Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning
products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
components such as chromed strips on the
exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for
using these products should be followed carefully. Solvents or stain removers should not be
used.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
CAUTION

•

Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components

•

Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface

•

Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used

Automatic car wash

• We do NOT recommend washing your car

CAUTION

•

Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to
avoid damaging the windshield wipers.

•

Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any
antenna(s) are retracted or removed.
Otherwise there is risk of the machine
dislodging them.

•

in an automatic wash during the first few
months (because the paint will not have
hardened sufficiently).

• An automatic wash is a simple and quick
way to clean your car, but it is worth
remembering that it may not be as thorough as when you yourself go over the car
with sponge and water. Keeping the underbody clean is most important, especially in
the winter. Some automatic washers do
not have facilities for washing the underbody.

Chromed wheels: Clean chromeplated wheels using the same detergents used for the body of the vehicle.
Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can
permanently stain chrome-plated
wheels.

WARNING

•

When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes,
including the parking brake, several
times in order to remove any moisture
from the brake linings.
Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This
constitutes a fire risk.

mal and the lights are designed to withstand
moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short
time.

Polishing and waxing

• Normally, polishing is not required during
the first year after delivery, however, waxing may be beneficial.

• Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
compound.

• After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
• Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.

• Waxing alone does not substitute for polishing a dull surface.

• A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy
to use and produce a long-lasting, highgloss finish that protects the bodywork
against oxidation, road dirt and fading.

• Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

Exterior lighting
Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as
headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-

351

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Vehicle care
CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of longlife or durable paint protection coatings,
some of which may claim to prevent pitting,
fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have
not been tested by Volvo for compatibility
with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them
may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,
or cloud. Damage caused by application of
paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.

Upholstery care
Fabric
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric
stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

AlcanteraTM suede-like material
Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a
soft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care
Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured
with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,

352

sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the
protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and
fading can result.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy
leather care kit formulated to clean and beautify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the
protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner
removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream
protectant restores a barrier against soil and
sunlight.

Protecting leather upholstery

Volvo also offers a special leather softener that
should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
reduces friction between leather and other finishes in the vehicle.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,
do not rub.

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on
a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream
to the upholstery with light circular movements.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and
protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and
Leather Softener 943 7429.

CAUTION

•

Under no circumstances should gasoline, naphtha or similar cleaning agents
be used on the plastic or the leather
since these can cause damage.

•

Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring
can spread.

•

Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent can damage the seat padding.

•

Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.

•

Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.

•

Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may stain
the upholstery.

Cleaning a leather-covered steering
wheel

• Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp

If there are stains on the steering wheel:
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
–

Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel
with a solution with 5% ammonia. For
blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of
water and one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe
the stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for type I stains.
2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent
paper or a towel.

Cleaning floor mats
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed
clean regularly, especially during winter when
they should be taken out for drying. Spots on
textile mats can be removed with a mild detergent. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.
Consult your Volvo retailer.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood
surfaces
Cleaning interior plastic components should
be done with a cleaning agent specially
designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo
retailer.

Type 3 (dry soil or dust)
1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.
2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION
Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage
the leather on the steering wheel.

sponge and a neutral soap solution.

• Leather should be allowed to breath. Never
cover the steering wheel with a plastic protector.

Cleaning the seat belts
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild
soap solution.

• Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting
and conditioning the steering wheel with

353

09 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care

Touching up paintwork

Minor stone chips and scratches

Repairing stone chips

Material:
Primer – can
Paint – touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape

If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare
metal and an undamaged color coat remains,
you can add paint immediately after removing
dirt.
Paint code on the model plate1

Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish
regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.
Touch-up if necessary.
Paint repairs require special equipment and
skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive damage.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using
Volvo touch-up paint.

Color code
Make sure you have the right color. The color
code number is stated on the model plate.

354

see page 358 for the location of the model plate.

G021832

•
•
•
•

NOTE
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

Minor scratches on the surface

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with
a small brush.

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the metal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as
soon as the spot has been cleaned.

3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint
can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint
thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats
and let dry after each application.
4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want
to protect surrounding paint by masking it
off
5. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of polish.

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

355

Label information..................................................................................
Specifications........................................................................................
Overview of information and warning symbols.....................................
Volvo programs.....................................................................................

356

358
360
366
369

SPECIFICATIONS

10 Specifications
Label information
Location of labels
10

358

10 Specifications
Label information
List of labels
Model
plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The
model plate is located on the rear side of
the B-pillar (the pillar between the front and
rear passenger doors) and the rear passenger's door must be open in order to see
it.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards
(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet
all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of
the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please
consult your Volvo retailer.

Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top
left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) should always
be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when
ordering parts.

Vehicle Emission Control Information.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable emission standards, as evidenced by
the certification label on the underside of
the hood. For further information regarding
these regulations, please consult your
Volvo retailer.

Tire inflation
pressures. This label indicates the correct
inflation pressures for the tires that were on
the vehicle when it left the factory. Canadian models have the upper decal; U.S.
models have the lower one.

359

10 Specifications
Specifications
Dimensions
10

360

Dimension

In (mm)

Wheelbase

109.2 (2774)

Length

182.2 (4627)

Load length, floor, seatback down

70.4 (1789)

Load length, floor

38.3 (972)

Height

67.4 (1713)

Load height

31.6 (802)

Track, front

64.3 (1632)

10 Specifications
Specifications
Dimension

In (mm)

Track, rear

62.4 (1586)

Load width, floor

42.9 (1090)

Width

74.4 (1891)

Width incl. door mirrors (folded out)

83.5 (2120)

Width incl. door mirrors (folded in)

74.4 (1891)

Weights
Category

USA

Gross vehicle weight

6-cyl. FWDA: 5200 lbs
6-cyl.

Canada

AWDB:

5355 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 2360 kg
6-cyl. AWD:2430 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD:2440 kg

Capacity weight

950 lbs (all models)

430 kg (all models)

Permissible axle weights, front

6-cyl. FWD: 2740 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 1245 kg

6-cyl. AWD: 2800 lbs

6-cyl. AWD:1270 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2840 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD:1290 kg

6-cyl. FWD: 2545 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 1155 kg

6-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs

6-cyl. AWD:1200 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2645 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD:1200 kg

3870 - 4220 lbs

1750 - 1910 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear

Curb weight

361

10 Specifications
Specifications

Volvo 2013 XC60 Owner's Manual Owners

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation